wiley trading - sammy chua's day trade your way to financial freedom - 2007
DESCRIPTION
tradingTRANSCRIPT
Sammy Chua
John Wiley & Sons, Inc.
Sammy Chua’s
DAY TRADE Your Way to
FINANCIAL FREEDOM
2 N D E D I T I O N
14762_Chua_2p_ffirst.j.qxp 2/2/07 11:26 AM Page i
Copyright © 2007 by Sammy Chua. All rights reserved.
Published by John Wiley & Sons, Inc., Hoboken, New Jersey.Published simultaneously in Canada.
Wiley Bicentennial Logo: Richard J. Pacifico
All graphics courtesy of CyberTrader.
No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted in anyform or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, scanning, or otherwise,except as permitted under Section 107 or 108 of the 1976 United States Copyright Act, withouteither the prior written permission of the Publisher, or authorization through payment of theappropriate per-copy fee to the Copyright Clearance Center, Inc., 222 Rosewood Drive, Danvers,MA 01923, (978) 750-8400, fax (978) 750-4470, or on the web at www.copyright.com. Requests tothe Publisher for permission should be addressed to the Permissions Department, John Wiley &Sons, Inc., 111 River Street, Hoboken, NJ 07030, (201) 748-6011, fax (201) 748-6008, or online athttp://www.wiley.com/go/permissions.
Limit of Liability/Disclaimer of Warranty: While the publisher and author have used their bestefforts in preparing this book, they make no representations or warranties with respect to the accu-racy or completeness of the contents of this book and specifically disclaim any implied warrantiesof merchantability or fitness for a particular purpose. No warranty may be created or extended bysales representatives or written sales materials. The advice and strategies contained herein maynot be suitable for your situation. You should consult with a professional where appropriate. Nei-ther the publisher nor author shall be liable for any loss of profit or any other commercial dam-ages, including but not limited to special, incidental, consequential, or other damages.
For general information on our other products and services or for technical support, please con-tact our Customer Care Department within the United States at (800) 762-2974, outside theUnited States at (317) 572-3993 or fax (317) 572-4002.
Wiley also publishes its books in a variety of electronic formats. Some content that appears inprint may not be available in electronic books. For more information about Wiley products, visitour web site at www.wiley.com.
Library of Congress Cataloging-in-Publication Data:
Chua, Sammy.Sammy Chua’s day trade your way to financial freedom / Sammy Chua.—2nd ed.
p. cm.Includes index.ISBN-13: 978-0-471-74558-7 (cloth)ISBN-10: 0-471-74558-8 (cloth)1. Day trading (Securities) 2. Electronic trading of securities. 3. Investment analysis.
I. Title: Day trade your way to financial freedom. II. Title.HG4515.95.C49 2006332.64′2—dc22 2005031909
Printed in the United States of America
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
14762_Chua_2p_ffirst.j.qxp 2/2/07 11:26 AM Page ii
CONTENTS
PREFACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . vii
INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
CHAPTER ONE
An Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5• The Stock Markets
• The Exchange System
• NYSE Time Lines
• Listed Stocks
• The Specialist System
• Who’s Who on the Exchange Floor
• The SuperDOT System
CHAPTER TWO
The Big Board and Nasdaq . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
• The Over-the-Counter Market (OTC)
• NASD and Nasdaq
• Nasdaq Is a Negotiated Market
• Understanding Market Makers
• Information Is Power
• Nasdaq Service Levels I, II, and III
• Comparing the NYSE and Nasdaq
• Electronic Communications Networks (ECNs)
• Regulatory Framework
• Quick Quiz
14762_Chua_2p_ftoc.j.qxp 2/2/07 11:26 AM Page iii
iv CONTENTS
CHAPTER THREE
Brokerage Firms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25• Selecting a Brokerage
• Execution Speed
• Reliability
• Order Routing
• Price
• Service
• Other Online Brokerage Features
• Types of Accounts
• Types of Positions
• Types of Trading Orders
CHAPTER FOUR
Direct Access Order Entry System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39• Nasdaq Direct
• SuperMontage
• TotalView
• ECNs
• SuperDOT
• Order Execution Systems Review
CHAPTER FIVE
Elements of Successful Trading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47• Minimum Requirements to Begin Trading
• Psychology of Trading
• Risk Management
• Trading Methodology
CHAPTER SIX
Trading Strategies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59• Scalping
• Intraday-Trend Trading
14762_Chua_2p_ftoc.j.qxp 2/2/07 11:26 AM Page iv
CONTENTS v
• Swing Trading
• Long-Term Trading
• Back Testing
CHAPTER SEVEN
Technical Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65• Charts
• Identifying Support and Resistance
• Trading Strategies
• Trendlines
• Gaps
• Basic Chart Patterns
• Volume Analysis
CHAPTER EIGHT
Candlestick Charting Techniques . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115• Spotting Heavy Buying and Selling Pressures
• Comparing Buying and Selling Pressures
• Spotting Indecision with Candlesticks
• Understanding Intraperiod Activity
• Candlestick Positions
• Bullish Patterns
• Bearish Patterns
CHAPTER NINE
Spotting Trends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151• Technical Indicators
• Key to Using Indicators
• Moving Averages
• Moving Average Convergence Divergence
• MACD Histogram
• Stochastic Oscillator
• Relative Strength Index
14762_Chua_2p_ftoc.j.qxp 2/2/07 11:26 AM Page v
vi CONTENTS
• On-Balance Volume
• Accumulation/Distribution
• Futures and Pivot Points
• Conclusion
CHAPTER TEN
Preparing for the Open . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177• The Trading Day
• Do the Research
• Manage Risk
• Set Alerts and Trading Screens
• Intraday Trading
• Market Indices
• Other Market Indicators
• Direction of Market Trends
• Keep a Trade Journal
CONCLUSION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
INDEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
14762_Chua_2p_ftoc.j.qxp 2/2/07 11:26 AM Page vi
PREFACE
WHEN SAMMY CHUAASKED ME to edit his new book on day trad-
ing, I jumped at the chance. As a reporter for Investor’s Business
Daily, I had covered day trading for several years. Too many of the
day trading gurus I wrote about were interested only in getting novice traders into
their shop, bleeding them dry, and then shoving them out the door when their cap-
ital had run dry.
Sammy Chua was an exception. He has made a fortune using trading methods
that I believe to be superior to the many other methods I have covered. Now he
wants to teach others how to succeed in this miraculous profession. There is no
hidden agenda with Sammy. His zeal to teach is genuine and heartfelt. He wants
to teach beginners to protect their capital and to avoid the psychological traps that
often spell disaster for new traders. Sammy Chua wants you to have the same suc-
cess he has had.
Day trading has come a long way in the past 10 years. It is a risky occupation,
but a small group of talented people have developed ways of lessening the risk
and increasing the potential for profit. Sammy Chua is number one on this list.
Here’s a short version of his strategy: The controlling factor in day trading is,
according to Sammy, supply and demand. If demand for a stock is great, the sup-
ply will decrease, driving the stock price upward. If demand is poor, supply will
increase, driving the stock price down. You don’t need a broker or an army of
research analysts to tell you when the laws of supply and demand are pushing a
stock up or down. Just pay attention to what Sammy has to say in this book.
Concentrating on supply and demand is liberating. It frees the trader from the
onerous chore of picking stocks based on the industry they represent. Sammy once
drove this home to me in a phone conversation. He talked about making a good
profit the day before on Corning. I remarked that I liked Corning, because the
company was in the rapidly growing fiber optics business.
Sammy took a deep breath and said, “Pete, I don’t know what Corning does. I
don’t care what they do. I don’t know anything about any of the companies I trade.
14762_Chua_2p_fpref.j.qxp 2/2/07 11:31 AM Page vii
viii PREFACE
All I know is the stock generated a strong buy signal based on several indicators.
Institutions are jumping in big-time, which means supply is dwindling. That’s all
I care about.”
And that’s all day trading should be about. It’s about supply and demand,
learning to read indicators and volume trends, and sticking rigidly to a loss pre-
vention program. But I’ll let Sammy Chua explain this to you. He is a proven win-
ner in the fine art of day trading. Learn and enjoy.
Peter McKenna
Editor
14762_Chua_2p_fpref.j.qxp 2/2/07 11:31 AM Page viii
INTRODUCTION
DAY TRADING IS THE MIRROR OPPOSITE of the buy and hold strat-
egy. It means trading frequently, trying to capture small profits while
limiting risk. You do not buy a stock and hold it for years. Good
traders learn what makes stock prices move up or down, and they use this knowl-
edge to make money on a daily basis.
Consider, for example, just one of the important bits of knowledge this book
will teach you: the theory of supply and demand as it applies to stock prices. When
institutions such as brokerages and mutual funds buy huge amounts of a stock—
IBM, for example—the available supply of that stock will diminish. This in turn
will drive the price of IBM stock upward. A day trader who learns to spot stocks
that are under heavy accumulation can use that knowledge to catch a ride on IBM
as its price goes up. The same is true in reverse. If institutions are selling a stock,
it’s supply will increase, driving the price down. An alert day trader will short this
stock for a brief time as its price falls.
When done correctly, day trading can help investors avoid the periodic losses
that come with the traditional buy and hold strategy. Since the first stock was
traded more than 200 years ago in New York City, the overall direction of the mar-
kets has been upward. For this reason, the buy and hold strategy makes sense if
you want to hold stocks for several years.
However, the market does not make this upward climb in a straight line. There
are periods of months and sometimes years when prices come crashing down or
move sideways. This is the classic bear market. Long-term investors who get
caught in these downdrafts can be badly hurt.
Suppose, for example, that you put a lot of money into Lucent Technologies
when it was trading near $20 in 1999. The stock soared to nearly $80 by January
2000. Everything was rosy. Many long-term investors held onto tech stocks such as
Lucent, thinking they would go up forever, providing the money for retirement or
college tuition or a new car in the years ahead. Lucent was their nest egg.
14762_Chua_2p_cintro.j.qxp 2/2/07 11:31 AM Page 1
2 INTRODUCTION
But things turned nasty in 2000 and 2001. The tech sector collapsed and the mar-
ket came tumbling down. It bears repeating that the market cannot go up forever.
Something always brings it down. Lucent now trades at about $3. Investors who
bought Lucent in 1999 and held on have been left with next to nothing.
When the tech bubble burst, a day trader who understood the supply and
demand theory mentioned previously would have spotted Lucent, or any num-
ber of other tech stocks. They would have seen the selling pressure and shorted
the stock, making money immediately. The rewards and risks of the day trading
strategy are immediate; they are not long-term promises that may or may not
materialize.
This is a great time to be a day trader. Although day trading has been around for
several years, recent changes in technology and securities laws have opened it to
simple folks like you and me. Today, we can trade from any location. All we need
is an Internet connection and a computer. We also have the ability to place orders
directly into the stock exchanges, which is almost like buying a seat on the
exchange itself.
Day trading is not for everyone. To be successful, you have to love what you do.
If day trading does not fit your personality, you will not last long. For example,
day trading can be risky. You can lose money in a few seconds. Risk taking comes
naturally to some people but shakes others to the core. If you feel comfortable buy-
ing only companies with strong, long-term fundamentals, then short-term trading,
particularly day trading, is not for you. But if your desire for financial freedom is
strong enough, if you are willing to develop the discipline it takes to trade success-
fully, you have the right mentality to be a frequent trader.
Before we continue, let me make an important point: This book covers many
different trading strategies. You do not have to master all of them to be successful.
Traders who concentrate on just one or two strategies almost always become suc-
cessful faster than traders who want to know everything before they take the
plunge. The same is true in all professions. Both general practitioners and heart
surgeons, for example, are doctors. But heart surgeons are specialists and enjoy
more success than general practitioners. Be the heart surgeon and learn to special-
ize in one strategy before moving on.
14762_Chua_2p_cintro.j.qxp 2/2/07 11:31 AM Page 2
INTRODUCTION 3
As you read this book, try to decide whether you have the type of personality it
takes to be a trader. Remember, trading is an ongoing process of learning. You
must be willing to constantly adapt to the ever-changing market. Trading requires
constant reading, picking the brains of those who have already succeeded, and a
bulldog tenacity to learn your craft. It can be exciting, even exhilarating, when
things go your way. There is no limit to the profits you can earn. Your success
depends on how much effort you are willing to commit to learning. Let’s get
started.
14762_Chua_2p_cintro.j.qxp 2/2/07 11:31 AM Page 3
14762_Chua_2p_cintro.j.qxp 2/2/07 11:31 AM Page 4
CHAPTER 1
An Overview• The Stock Markets
• The Exchange System
• NYSE Time Line
• Listed Stocks
• The Specialist System
• Who’s Who on the Exchange Floor
• The SuperDOT System
14762_Chua_2p_c01.j.qxp 2/2/07 11:32 AM Page 5
You will not be able to execute these strategies
unless you learn how the stock markets work.
Every day, millions of shares move back and forth
from one investor to another. How is this done?
Who are the people who execute these trades for
investors? How do you get the best price on your
order? Which electronic routing systems are the
best for day traders? What does all this back-and-
forth mean to the day trader? These are the basics.
Learn them well.
In the United States, stocks are bought and sold
in two different venues: stock exchanges and over-
the-counter markets (OTCs). This chapter explores
the differences between the two systems, particu-
larly the differences that will affect your career as a
day trader.
THE EXCHANGE SYSTEM
The largest stock exchange in the world, trading
more than 3,000 stocks, is the New York Stock
6 SAMMY CHUA’S DAY TRADE YOUR WAY TO FINANCIAL FREEDOM
Exchange (NYSE). The NYSE is situated on Wall
Street in New York City. It is also known as the Big
Board and is considered the center of the stock-
trading universe. The NYSE was created in 1792 by
24 traders who got together to trade a few shares in
two small, local companies. From this humble
beginning, the stock market grew into the beast it
is today. Most day traders, however, never set foot
inside the NYSE. Including the NYSE, there are
seven stock exchanges in the United States, but the
NYSE is the granddaddy of them all. The others
are smaller, regional exchanges that look to the
NYSE as the leader.
An exchange is a place where buyers and sellers
physically get together on a central trading floor to
buy and sell. Floor trading is essentially an auction
in which price is determined by supply and
demand. The trades may be routed by computer,
but they all eventually come to the market floor for
execution. The exchanges are membership organi-
zations. The members trade securities on behalf of
THE STOCK MARKETS
DAY TRADING INVOLVES THE FINE ART of finding stocks that
will come under buying or selling pressure. This pressure makes
the stock price move significantly up or down. That’s the first
step. Knowing when these stocks are likely to make their move is the second
step. The final step is executing a trade to capture a brief portion of this
move, making a profit in the process.
14762_Chua_2p_c01.j.qxp 2/2/07 11:32 AM Page 6
AN OVERVIEW 7
their clients or for themselves. Both individuals
and big securities firms are members of the NYSE.
NYSE TIME LINES
HISTORIC MILESTONES
1865 The average daily volume is about 34,000 shares
traded for 141 companies.
1900 Volume grows to 505,000 shares per day for 369
companies.
1920 Volume is 825,000 shares per day for 689
companies.
1940 Down to 750,000 shares per day for 862
companies, volume explodes.
1960 Average daily volume rises to 3 million shares for
1,143 companies.
1980 Volume is 44 million shares per day for 1,570
companies.
1987 Largest one day percentage drop occurs.
1990 Volume is 157 million shares per day, 1,774
companies.
1997 Volume is 525 million shares per day for 3,028
companies.
1997 All-time record 1.2 billion shares are traded on mini-
crash day, October 27.
2000 Both the biggest point jump (499.19) and the
biggest point slide (617.78) occur.
2001 Trading in fractions ends.
2003 NYSE Composite Index is relaunched using revised
methodology.
2005 ARCA and the NYSE merge.
TECHNOLOGICAL ADVANCES
1878 The first telephone is installed.
1978 The first electronic linkage to other exchanges is
installed.
1984 Orders are electronically routed to the floor using
SuperDOT system.
1995 Hundreds of old TV-style monitors are replaced with
modern flat-panel displays in the world’s largest
installation of this technology to date.
1996 Floor brokers start using handheld wireless
information tools.
LISTED STOCKS
Stocks traded on the NYSE are called listed stocks.
This means the underlying company has met the
requirements necessary to list its stock on the
NYSE. One requirement, for example, is market
capitalization. To be listed on the NYSE, a company
usually must have a market capitalization of at
least $100 million. (Market capitalization is deter-
mined by multiplying the stock price times total
shares outstanding.) These rules were designed to
prevent the Mafia from getting money-laundering
companies listed on an exchange.
Stocks with a large market capitalization are
called large-cap stocks. They are usually estab-
lished companies. For example, IBM, founded in
1911, has a market capitalization of $124.64 billion
and is a large-cap stock traded on the NYSE. Other
large-caps traded on the NYSE include DuPont,
Ford, Coca-Cola, General Electric, Alcoa, and
14762_Chua_2p_c01.j.qxp 2/2/07 11:32 AM Page 7
AT&T. It is important to remember that large-cap
stocks traded on the NYSE are not as volatile as
OTC stocks. This can be an asset or a liability to the
day trader. However, some large-cap stocks, even
though they trade on the NYSE, are volatile.
Energy stocks and pharmaceuticals are examples.
Before I discuss how these stocks are traded,
here is a list of terms you should know. They apply
to the workings of both the NYSE and the OTC:
Best bid. The price a buyer is willing to pay to buy a
stock.
Best ask. The price at which someone who owns a stock
is willing to sell it.
Broker. One who arranges the sale of a stock.
Dealer. Usually a brokerage, such as Charles Schwab. Bro-
kers sell the stocks that dealers keep in their inventories.
THE SPECIALIST SYSTEM
Exchange trading is carried out by a person called
a specialist. Specialists control the auction process.
Their job is to match buyers with sellers. The spe-
cialist looks at an electronic order book of bids and
asks and matches them according to price and
quantity. The specialist, for example, will match a
person willing to buy 100 shares of IBM at $80 with
a person willing to sell 100 shares of IBM at $80.
Specialists are the people you see running around
on the floor of the NYSE. The specialist and his or
her clerks are assigned responsibility for one or
two stocks. They handle all bids and offers for
these stocks.
8 SAMMY CHUA’S DAY TRADE YOUR WAY TO FINANCIAL FREEDOM
There is more to a specialist’s job than matching
buyers and sellers. They are expected to maintain
an orderly and fair market. When there is an excess
of buy or sell orders, making it impossible to
match orders evenly, the specialist steps in. There
may be 1,000 people who want to sell IBM at $80,
for example, but only 100 people who are willing
to pay this price. This situation, called an order
imbalance, sometimes causes trading to be tem-
porarily suspended. An opening delay usually
happens when a news event or extreme imbalance
of orders prevents the stock from trading when the
market opens. The specialist has 15 minutes from
the opening bell to determine a price range at
which the stock will begin trading.
A specialist can delay an opening or halt trading
until a proper balance of buyers and sellers is
achieved. Usually, the stock will start trading at a
price far different from its previous price. Some
day traders try to profit from these imbalances,
which occur frequently.
Specialists profit from the spread, the difference
between the bid price and ask price, for each
market-order transaction in which a spread exists.
A market order is an order to buy or sell a stock at
the market’s current best displayed price.
A good specialist will be assigned responsibil-
ity for more stocks than the usual one or two. Spe-
cialists may trade for their own firm’s accounts as
well, buying low and selling high to make a
profit.
Specialists are predictable. Novice day traders
who want to trade stocks on the NYSE should
get to know the habits of the specialists they are
14762_Chua_2p_c01.j.qxp 2/2/07 11:32 AM Page 8
AN OVERVIEW 9
dealing with. There are several day trading firms
whose members make a good living just by follow-
ing the actions of the specialists. Their aim is to
capture small profits several times a day, just like
the specialist.
WHO’S WHO ON THE EXCHANGE FLOOR
In addition to the specialist, here are the people
who make the NYSE hum:
Specialist’s clerk. The clerk sits next to the specialist.
They stand ready to maintain the electronic order book
and report executions. The order book contains buy and
sell orders at different prices, including the current market
price. These are the orders and prices that must be
matched.
Floor brokers. Brokers usually represent big-name bro-
kerage firms. They handle large (block trades) or sensitive
orders. The brokers deliver these orders to the specialists.
They are allowed to negotiate orders with the specialists or
other floor brokers in the presence of a specialist.
Floor clerks. These people deliver orders from the floor
brokers to the specialists.
Member firms. A big-name brokerage firm that has a
seat on the NYSE. If your brokerage firm is not a member,
your order will pass through another firm that is a member.
Floor traders. These are independent traders. They trade
for their own accounts and can represent institutions when
contracted.
Customer. A customer can be a day trader, an investor, or
a large institution. Generally, they are not present on the
floor, but their orders are the cause of all the activity you
see on the floor.
There are 17 trading posts on the trading floor.
Each post is semicircular and about 15 feet across.
Each post trades an average of 150 securities. The
specialists are stationed outside the trading posts
in designated spots. The clerk sits inside the post
and communicates with the specialist through a
window. Display monitors hang above the post
windows so the clerk and the specialist can watch
the floor broker and the order books at the same
time. Huge conduits rise up from the trading floor,
carrying data lines to the exchange computers.
THE SUPERDOT SYSTEM
Buy and sell orders on the NYSE are routed to the
exchange floor by an electronic system called
Super Designated Order Turnaround, or Super-
DOT. The best way to understand the miracle of
this system is to compare it with the routing meth-
ods used before the SuperDOT was implemented.
Figure 1.1 gives you an idea of the long process
needed to route orders in the old days. As you can
see, getting a trade executed in the old days took
time. The trader called a stockbroker and placed the
order. The stockbroker called the order in to the
trading desk. The desk relayed the order to a floor
broker at the NYSE. The order was then passed to a
floor clerk, who would give it to the specialist for
execution. After the order was executed, a confir-
mation (or trade report) would flow backward
through the same process until it reached the trader.
14762_Chua_2p_c01.j.qxp 2/2/07 11:32 AM Page 9
Every transaction required multiple pieces of
paper, which were crumpled up to distinguish
them from paperwork that might have been acci-
dentally dropped. That was why, in the old days,
the floor of the stock exchange was littered with
small scraps of paper. The SuperDOT system has
eliminated most but not all of the paperwork.
10 SAMMY CHUA’S DAY TRADE YOUR WAY TO FINANCIAL FREEDOM
Paper is still used for negotiating large and special
orders.
SuperDOT is fast and reliable. Orders go
directly to the specialist. This minimizes the time
involved, and trade reports are made within sec-
onds, except on the busiest days. Brokers who
trade on this system have what is called direct
Customer Places Order
Trading Desk
Floor Broker
Floor Clerk
Customer Gets Confirmation
Trading Desk
Floor Broker
Floor Clerk
Specialist Executes Order
1.1 Historical Buy and Sell Order Routing System Used on the New York Stock Exchange
� WHEN THERE IS AN EXCESS of buy and sell orders, the specialist steps in.
Customer PlacesOrder
SpecialistExecutes Order
Customer GetsConfirmation
1.2 SuperDOT System (Super Designated Order Turnaround System)
� COMPANIES WITH SMALL MARKET CAPS are handled on the Bulletin Board and the Pink Sheets.
14762_Chua_2p_c01.j.qxp 2/2/07 11:32 AM Page 10
AN OVERVIEW 11
access to the NYSE market. If you are a day trader
and your broker is a NYSE member, your order
will most likely be delivered through SuperDOT.
A quick look at the flowchart in Figure 1.2 gives
you an idea of how streamlined this new process
is. It is important to note that SuperDOT is not an
automatic-execution system. Orders are routed
electronically through SuperDOT, but they are still
executed by specialists. If there is an order imbal-
ance or if you have placed a limit order, SuperDOT
will automatically deliver your order, but that
doesn’t guarantee that your order will be exe-
cuted. If there is no match, the trade will not be
filled. ●$
14762_Chua_2p_c01.j.qxp 2/2/07 11:32 AM Page 11
14762_Chua_2p_c01.j.qxp 2/2/07 11:32 AM Page 12
CHAPTER 2
The Big Boardand Nasdaq
• The Over-the-Counter Market (OTC)
• NASD and Nasdaq
• Nasdaq Is a Negotiated Market
• Understanding Market Makers
• Information Is Power
• Nasdaq Service Levels I, II, and III
• Comparing NYSE and Nasdaq
• Electronic Communications Networks (ECNs)
• Regulatory Framework
• Quick Quiz
14762_Chua_2p_c02.j.qxp 2/2/07 11:32 AM Page 13
While the NYSE trades large-cap stocks, the
OTC is home to smaller companies. Many technol-
ogy companies with small market capitalization
trade over the OTC. They are often less established
than companies found on the exchanges. For
example, eBay, a seven-year-old tech company
with a market capitalization of $17 billion, trades
on the OTC.
Over-the-counter trading is done by people
called market makers. You never see these men and
women, because they work out of sight at com-
puter terminals across the country. In contrast to
the NYSE, where stocks are put up for auction,
market makers buy and sell from their own inven-
tory of stocks.
Numerous types of securities are traded on the
OTC, including but not limited to the following:
● Corporate stock
● Corporate bonds
● Municipal bonds
● U.S. government securities
● U.S. government agency securities
14 SAMMY CHUA’S DAY TRADE YOUR WAY TO FINANCIAL FREEDOM
Of these, day traders are mainly interested in cor-
porate stock.
NASD AND NASDAQ
Market makers trade through an electronic system
run by the National Association of Securities Deal-
ers (NASD). It is called the National Association of
Securities Dealers Automated Quotation System,
or Nasdaq. It is the NASD’s equivalent of the
NYSE’s SuperDOT system.
Nasdaq began operating in 1971. The purpose
of Nasdaq is to collect and provide real-time, firm
quotes on selected OTC stocks through its auto-
mated quotation system. This system was a major
advance for OTC trading. Previously, if dealers
wanted to sell a stock for $35, they had to get on
the phone and find another dealer willing to pay
$35. They had to keep calling until a buyer was
found. The process was cumbersome and slow.
Essentially, Nasdaq is a real-time classified ad.
Traders post their buy and sell orders for the rest of
the trading world to see. It also provides a means
THE OVER-THE-COUNTER MARKET (OTC)
THE OTC DIFFERS FROM THE NYSE in important ways. However,
it, too, uses a state-of-the-art computer system to route trades.
There is no central trading floor in the OTC market. Transactions
move from computer to computer, over the Internet, or over electronic trad-
ing platforms.
14762_Chua_2p_c02.j.qxp 2/2/07 11:32 AM Page 14
THE BIG BOARD AND NASDAQ 15
to get orders executed. Nasdaq trades some of the
biggest names in technology, such as Intel and
Microsoft. The Nasdaq system allows large institu-
tional buyers, market makers, brokerage houses,
electronic day traders, and online investors to
come together to communicate their trading inten-
tions in real time. It is a high-speed, state-of-the-art
computer network bazaar.
Securities traded on Nasdaq are grouped into
the following three classifications:
●1 The National Market Securities (NMS) are the highest
classification, or tier, of Nasdaq stocks. There are more
than 4,000 NMS stocks. These stocks meet the highest
standards with regard to annual net income, price per
share, number of publicly held shares, and so on. They
are considered large-cap stocks.
●2 The small-cap market is the next group, comprising more
than 1,300 securities. They have smaller market capital-
ization than do large caps.
●3 Companies with very small market capitalization are han-
dled on the OTC Bulletin Board and the Pink Sheets.
Day traders are mainly interested in the NMS
tier of stocks—the large caps.
NASDAQ IS A NEGOTIATED MARKET
While the NYSE requires a specialist to act as an
auctioneer or intermediary, the Nasdaq allows
buyers and sellers to interact directly without an
intermediary. That is why Nasdaq is called a nego-
tiated market. The buyer who offers the best price
will get taken care of first. The seller offering the
lowest price will likewise get a faster response
from buyers. Nasdaq is automated and simplified.
Remember, at the NYSE, stocks are sold at auction
by an intermediary. Nasdaq stocks are bought and
sold on a best-price basis.
UNDERSTANDING MARKET MAKERS
Market makers make day trading exciting. They
are dealers who buy and sell stocks on behalf of
their clients or for their own firm. They provide
liquidity for their customers and make the Nasdaq
market viable. When a stock is liquid, it means the
price will not be greatly changed by heavy buying
or selling.
Market makers make money by capturing
momentum moves. They also make money captur-
ing the spread, just like NYSE specialists. Market
makers also act as commissioned representatives
for large financial firms or mutual funds. As reps,
market makers become brokers acting on their
client’s behalf to buy or sell a security. When market
makers act as intermediaries for a big firm, they get
paid a commission. The commission is usually the
spread between the inside bid and the inside ask. In
most cases, small orders from traders like you and
me come from a market maker’s own inventory.
The term market maker refers to a securities firm
as well as an individual. Examples are Goldman
Sachs and Morgan Stanley, firms that are regis-
tered to buy and sell specific securities. As market
makers, they abide by Nasdaq rules when making
a market. Market makers are required by Nasdaq
to maintain a two-sided market. This means they
14762_Chua_2p_c02.j.qxp 2/2/07 11:32 AM Page 15
are required to post both a bid price and an ask
price at the same time.
Unlike specialists and floor brokers, market
makers work in offices, using computers and the
telephone to make the market. One market maker
may handle a single security or 25 at a time. There
are approximately 60 market makers trading the
6,000 securities on Nasdaq. Usually, the big-name
stocks have 40 or more market makers, while the
smaller-name stocks have just a few. Tracking and
understanding their methods is vitally important
for the day trader.
The Three Main Responsibilities of Market Makers
●1 Execute transactions for their clients. The most impor-
tant function is to execute orders for clients at the best
possible price. They do this by interacting with other mar-
ket makers online or by telephone.
●2 Keep an orderly market. This means they must prevent
dramatic fluctuations in the price of a stock that comes
under heavy buying or selling pressure. To create this liq-
uidity, market makers must provide a two-sided market
within the market bid/ask price. Liquidity happens as
market makers fulfill their obligation to make markets
throughout the trading day. They must advertise to sell at a
certain price whenever they make a bid to buy a stock at
a certain price. That’s why it’s called a two-sided market.
●3 Trade for the firm’s proprietary account. Market makers
use inside knowledge, experience, and technology to
make profits on a daily basis. They take profits on the
stocks they make a market in, but they also take specula-
tive positions on the possibility of future price movements
of those stocks—depending on the time of day, the market
conditions, and the existing order flow.
16 SAMMY CHUA’S DAY TRADE YOUR WAY TO FINANCIAL FREEDOM
Different Types of Market MakersIt is important for day traders to be aware of the
different types of market makers and understand
the trading patterns they create. Here’s why.
Market makers do the lion’s share of trading on
the OTC. Big market-making firms, such as Gold-
man Sachs, Paine Webber, Salomon Brothers, and
Merrill Lynch, represent large institutions, such as
pension funds and mutual funds. They buy and
sell for these clients. They also trade for their own
retail customers and their own trading accounts.
The sheer volume of this trading can have a dra-
matic impact on stock prices.
You can watch market makers trading on
what’s known as Level II computer screens. Pat-
terns will emerge if you watch them over time.
They repeat certain actions throughout the day,
giving you insight into their true buy and sell
intentions and market direction. Keep in mind that
market makers do not always make the right deci-
sions. The market as a whole is always more pow-
erful than any single market maker.
The following will help you recognize the vari-
ous types of market makers as you watch Level II
screens. Trading symbols are given for each firm.
The information available on Level II is discussed
in detail later in this chapter.
INSTITUTIONAL FIRMS
GSCO Goldman Sachs & Co.
SBSH Salomon Smith Barney
LEHM Lehman Brothers
MSCO Morgan Stanley & Co.
14762_Chua_2p_c02.j.qxp 2/2/07 11:32 AM Page 16
THE BIG BOARD AND NASDAQ 17
These worldwide firms do the largest underwrit-
ings. They cater to big institutions like mutual
funds and pension funds. They have well-financed
research departments. They are the most powerful
market makers and can set the market on fire
when they trade.
WHOLESALERS
MASH Mayer & Schweitzer, Inc. (Charles Schwab)
HRZG Herzog, Hein & Geduld
SLKC Spear, Leeds & Kellogg
SHWD Sherwood
NITE Knight/Trimark
MHMY MH Meyerson & Co.
These firms do no retail business and provide no
research. They simply make a market for other
firms.
WIRE HOUSES
DEAN Dean Witter Reynolds
PAIN Paine Webber
PRUD Prudential Securities, Inc.
MLCO Merrill Lynch & Co.
These are big, full-service brokerage firms. They
provide financial advisors and brokers. They make
commissions from order flow and a growing cus-
tomer base.
REGIONAL FIRMS
PIPR Piper Jaffray
SWST Southwest Securities, Inc.
DAIN Dain Bosworth Inc.
WEAT Wheat, First Securities
These are smaller brokerage firms with less expo-
sure to the markets. They are cautious traders.
INVESTMENT BANKS
HMQT Hambrecht & Quist, Inc.
MONT Montgomery Securities
COWN Cowen & Co.
These are strictly underwriting firms. They help
companies complete initial public offerings (IPOs)
and secondary offerings. They are not primary
market makers, but they will trade stocks they
underwrite to help create market activity.
Market Maker RecapTo recap, the market maker must:
● Execute orders for their firm’s clients.
● Keep an orderly market.
● Trade for the firm’s proprietary accounts.
INFORMATION IS POWER
Day traders need as much information as they can
get. At the very least, they need to see who is buy-
ing, who is selling, and the prices offered by each
buyer and seller. Both the NYSE and the OTC pro-
vide information about the trades taking place on
their systems. The information is flashed on a Level
II computer screen. But the information provided
on NYSE Level II screens is basic, not nearly enough
14762_Chua_2p_c02.j.qxp 2/2/07 11:32 AM Page 17
to be used to day trade. If you look at a NYSE Level
II screen, for example, you will see large gaps in the
bid and ask prices. On a Nasdaq Level II screen, you
will see no such gaps (see Figure 2.1).
Figure 2.1 compares the details shown on a
NYSE Level II screen with the information shown
on a Nasdaq Level II screen. Remember, for day
traders, who rely on Level 2 information to make
decisions, information is critical. The Nasdaq pro-
vides far more information than the NYSE.
NASDAQ SERVICE LEVELS I, II, AND III
NASD is a self-regulatory organization. Its mem-
ber firms use Nasdaq terminals that display real-
time bids and offers, size of quotes, and other
information. Nasdaq sends this information
electronically to all market participants on three
levels.
Level IAvailable to stockbrokers and most online
investors, Level I provides the following basic
information:
Highest bid and lowest offer at any given time
(called the inside market)
High and low for the day
Volume for the day
Price change from previous day
Direction of last trade (uptick or downtick)
Size of highest bid and highest ask
Last transaction price
18 SAMMY CHUA’S DAY TRADE YOUR WAY TO FINANCIAL FREEDOM
Level IILevel II not only shows the size of the best bids
and offers, it also shows the depth. Depth is the
market that exists behind the best bid and offer,
also called the outside market. Level II shows the
next bids and offers for several levels up and down
from the best price. This is very important to the
day trader. It’s like sonar for a submariner or field
maps for Napoleon. It is the best crystal ball you
can have to determine the short-term direction of a
stock price.
Here’s another way of looking at the depth
offered by Level II. Let’s say Buyer A is bidding
$65 for a stock on Nasdaq. On Level II, sellers
are offering the stock for $65.25. Buyer A’s bid
and the sellers’ offer is the best bid and offer at
the time. Also listed on the screen are the out-
side market bids and offers, the next levels of
bids and offers down from the best bids and
offers. In the outside market, Buyer B is offering
to buy the same stock for $64.75 while another
seller is offering to sell at $65.50. In order for
Buyer B’s order to be executed, Buyer A’s order
has to get filled first and stock prices have to fall
to $64.75.
Level II shows the names and quotes of all regis-
tered market makers in each Nasdaq security. Day
traders and online traders can access Nasdaq’s
Level II through electronic communications net-
works (ECNs), which are explained later in this
chapter. Each of these systems has its own name,
which appears on the Level II screen.
The following information is displayed on the
Nasdaq Level II screen:
14762_Chua_2p_c02.j.qxp 2/2/07 11:32 AM Page 18
THE BIG BOARD AND NASDAQ 19
Which market makers are playing
Which ECNs are participating
Bids and offers
Size of the market (for both market maker and ECN)
Time that the market maker placed or refreshed a bid or offer
Time of each executed trade
Price of each executed trade
Size of each executed trade
Level IIILevel III permits market makers to enter bid and
offer prices into Nasdaq. It also provides a means
by which the trades are reported to Nasdaq. Level
III is to the market maker what ECNs are to the
day trader. It’s a system by which they can adver-
tise to buy or sell securities that appear on Level II.
Market makers use Level III to advertise on the
national system (Level II).
2.1 NYSE Level II versus Nasdaq Level II Information
THIS SECTION GIVES THE ACTIVITY ON THE STOCK:The change in price from the previous day, the highest and the lowest price of the day.Previous closing price, volume, spreadthe ratio of the sizes between the bid and ask price.
NAME OF THE STOCK
If you look atthe first 7 levelson the bid sideand comparethe two, you willnotice that theprices of IBMgoes from ?down to ? (adifference of$?) while INTConly drops from? to ? (a differ-ence of $)
THIS IS THE TIME AND SALES COLUMNaka “prints.” Any transaction that occurs will show up here.
� NYSE LEVEL II SCREENIBM is a listed stock that is traded on the NYSE
� NASDAQ LEVEL II SCREENINTC is an over the counter stock traded on the NASDAQ
14762_Chua_2p_c02.j.qxp 2/2/07 11:32 AM Page 19
COMPARING THE NYSE AND NASDAQ
The NYSE is an auction house maintained by spe-
cialists who receive orders and execute them by
matching them with other orders and sometimes
with orders from their own account. The special-
ist quotes at the inside bid or inside ask if the
spread becomes too wide. In this case, the special-
ist will trade from his or her own inventory. These
factors are apparent to the trader on the computer
screen. All other factors such as strategy are not
apparent, but sometimes they can be deduced by
watching the specialist’s trading patterns. The
orders received by the specialist flow electroni-
cally through SuperDOT. Only under unusual
circumstances do orders flow manually through a
floor broker. Price movement on the NYSE is
order-driven, because the specialist matches bids
and asks from the order book. Movement of
orders from one side to the other (buy to sell, or
sell to buy) creates price movement. The NYSE is
a traditional marketplace; its stocks are estab-
lished companies with high market capitaliza-
tion. The NYSE is a stable marketplace because
specialists can stop trading if the market’s order
flow becomes extremely maladjusted or out of
balance.
Nasdaq is a negotiated marketplace without
specialists. It is totally computer-driven. Market
makers compete in this marketplace. If Nasdaq
is dominated by anything, it is a nationwide
computer bulletin board (the OTCBB), which
lists all available quotes. It is a modern techno-
logical phenomenon. Nasdaq market makers are
20 SAMMY CHUA’S DAY TRADE YOUR WAY TO FINANCIAL FREEDOM
required to display quotes for the stocks they are
making a market in. Nasdaq stocks tend to be
smaller-capitalization stocks with high growth
potential.
Which Market Is Better for Day Traders?The answer depends on the individual. Nasdaq
provides more price movement. This higher intra-
day volatility also generates more intraday profit
opportunities. But large price fluctuations could
also mean greater losses. This means that trading
the Nasdaq requires more expertise and knowl-
edge.
However, many traders prefer the NYSE. It is
more stable and can absorb a lot more volume.
These traders make a good living by following the
specialist, but due to the narrower range on NYSE
stock prices, most traders take profits of less than
$1 on their intraday trades.
The bottom line: If you are willing to take the
risk, Nasdaq offers greater rewards. As a day
trader, my market of choice is the Nasdaq. It pro-
vides good opportunities every day.
ELECTRONIC COMMUNICATIONS NETWORKS (ECNs)
Electronic communications networks (ECNs) are
quasi stock markets. They are used by both NYSE
traders and OTC traders. Recently, the NYSE has
allowed traders to trade directly with each other
via electronic communications networks (ECNs).
They function as an exchange floor, except that
orders are filled electronically and there is no
14762_Chua_2p_c02.j.qxp 2/2/07 11:32 AM Page 20
THE BIG BOARD AND NASDAQ 21
trading floor. Currently, two of these networks
trade stocks that are listed on the NYSE. They are
INET and ARCA. ARCA recently merged with the
NYSE. Although the future is unclear on this
merger, one thing is sure: Speed will increase and
transaction costs will decrease. Both very good
things for the trader.
ECNs work on a first-come, first-served basis. If
the orders match, these transactions usually take a
fraction of a second. When a buy order at $35 hits
the network and a sell order at $35 is present, you
have a match. The order executes almost instanta-
neously. Because of their speed, ECNs are very
popular. They now account for a large proportion
of daily stock trades. I am sure this will continue to
increase in the future.
ECNs were introduced in 1969. They provided a
way for institutions to display their buy and sell
orders on the Nasdaq. It was also the start of elec-
tronically executed trades. Prior to this, a Nasdaq
trader had no way of executing trades except via
the telephone. ECNs sped up the process by hav-
ing every trade executed electronically. There is a
lot less handling, and transactions now occur in
fractions of a second instead of minutes. All orders
on ECNs are firm orders. This means the trader
who placed the order does not have the choice of
accepting or declining a matching order. As soon
as a matching order arrives into the network, the
trade is executed. In a fast market, this feature is
priceless. It allows traders to get in and out of their
positions quickly.
In 1996, the introduction of a new ECN called
Island (ISLD) allowed small traders like you and
me to access the Nasdaq directly. Prior to ISLD,
the ability to buy and sell directly in the Nasdaq
market was available only to large institutions.
Since then, many new ECNs have been estab-
lished. Island and Instinet joined forces to
become INET. Brut is the Nasdaq’s ECN. ARCA,
as mentioned earlier, has merged with the NYSE.
Changes and consolidation will continue. (Note:
As of this writing the Nasdaq is awaiting regula-
tory approval of its proposed acquisition of
INET.)
How ECNs WorkAs mentioned earlier, ECNs function as regional
exchange floors. They have their own individ-
ual markets and allow traders to trade directly
with each other. ECNs accept both trader (indi-
vidual) and broker (institution) orders. Do not
automatically assume an ECN order to be from
a trader like you and me. It could be a market
maker trying to hide his or her true identity and
intentions.
ECNs do not provide capital to facilitate trades.
They serve only as a conduit or intermediary to the
market. They give the trader a medium for order
placement and execution. They compete directly
with market makers for order flow. They have no
vested interest in the price of a stock. They now
account for a very large proportion of Nasdaq’s
total daily volume.
Traders enter bids and offers on a national sys-
tem that is visible worldwide. Real-time visibility
and volume equal liquidity. That’s why traders get
fast results.
14762_Chua_2p_c02.j.qxp 2/2/07 11:32 AM Page 21
The three main ECNs available to daytraders are:
●1 Inet (INET)
●2 Brut (formally owned by SunGard Data and now owned
by Nasdaq Stock Market, Inc.)
●3 Archipelago (ARCA), which recently merged with the NYSE
Other ECNs, playing smaller roles, include:
● Bloomberg Tradebook (BTRD)
● Attain (ATTN)
● NexTrade (NTRD)
22 SAMMY CHUA’S DAY TRADE YOUR WAY TO FINANCIAL FREEDOM
REGULATORY FRAMEWORK
The NASD is a self-regulatory organization. It
polices Nasdaq trading and the overall OTC mar-
ket. The Securities and Exchange Commission
(SEC), however, has the ultimate authority to
enforce securities laws and regulations. The SEC
also supervises and acts as a safety net for securi-
ties markets. The SEC constantly updates its poli-
cies and has the authority to mandate changes to
NASD rules and regulations. ●$
14762_Chua_2p_c02.j.qxp 2/2/07 11:32 AM Page 22
THE BIG BOARD AND NASDAQ 23
QUICK QUIZ
Test your knowledge of the investment marketplace by taking the quick quiz that follows.
The most famous stock exchange is the NYSE.
Securities sold on the Big Board are called:
(a) M1-6
(b) Listed securities
(c) VIP securities
(d) All of the above
(e) None of the above
Nasdaq:
(a) Is market maker territory
(b) Requires high-tech equipment
(c) Is made up of stocks in the OTC market
(d) All of the above
(e) A and B only
Which of the following statements are true
regarding market makers and their
responsibilities?
(a) They fulfill their firm’s customer order flow
(b) They have limited resources and do not do much
trading
(c) They are required to keep a two-sided (bid and
offer) market at all times
(d) All of the above
(e) A and C only
A specialist is:
(a) An assassin for the CIA
(b) A market maker who specializes in trading one stock
(c) An individual who is assigned a listed security on an
exchange
(d) Somebody who knows a lot of secret stuff
(e) A and D only
Which statements about the OTC market are
correct?
(a) The OTC market is a negotiated marketplace
(b) You can buy OTC securities at Kmart during the
blue-light special
(c) It employs stealth Ninjas to eliminate opponents
(d) OTC stocks come with a money-back guarantee
Which of the following statements are true
concerning market makers?
(a) They execute trades for their firm’s customers
(b) They have many different customers
(c) They are nice people
(d) Nasdaq’s Level II displays market makers’ quotes
(e) A, B, and D only
Which of the following types of market makers
are considered to be the most powerful?
(a) Wholesale firms like Sherwood
(b) Wire houses like Paine Webber
(c) Institutional firms like Goldman Sachs
(d) Investment banks like Montgomery
Which of the following are not market makers’
responsibilities (and which one is a trick)?
(a) To keep an orderly, two-sided market
(b) To trade for the firm’s proprietary account
(c) To instigate program trading when markets drop too
low or rise too high
(d) To never quote both a bid and an offer on the same
stock at the same time
(e) To advertise as a seller when they are really buyers
of a specific stock
14762_Chua_2p_c02.j.qxp 2/2/07 11:32 AM Page 23
14762_Chua_2p_c02.j.qxp 2/2/07 11:32 AM Page 24
CHAPTER 3
Brokerage Firms• Selecting a Brokerage
• Execution Speed
• Reliability
• Order Routing
• Price
• Service
• Other Online Brokerage Features
• Types of Accounts
• Types of Positions
• Types of Trading Orders
14762_Chua_2p_c03.j.qxp 2/2/07 11:33 AM Page 25
Full-Service BrokersThese are traditional, established brokerage
houses. They cater to people who do not have the
time to research stocks or follow the market. They
usually have research departments that make
stock recommendations. They also provide finan-
cial and portfolio planning services. This personal
attention means high fees.
Many brokerages provide clients with online
access to their accounts. But they do not provide
high-speed executions. These brokerages are best
for people who invest rather than trade.
One word of caution: Full-service brokerages
claim to have great research departments that will
find good stocks for you. Based on my experience
working for a brokerage, I would not put my trust
in them. The people you deal with are merely
sales representatives. They want to make sales
and collect commissions. They are looking after
their interests, not yours. It takes effort to find a
broker who truly has your well-being in mind. I
think this effort could be better spent learning
how to day trade. If you don’t have the time to
26 SAMMY CHUA’S DAY TRADE YOUR WAY TO FINANCIAL FREEDOM
trade, then buy an index fund and consistently
put money into it. In the long run, this strategy
will probably pay more than investing in individ-
ual stocks.
Discount BrokersThese brokers provide automated systems that
take orders through the Internet. They also take
orders over the phone. Because there is less han-
dling involved, they charge lower commissions
than full-service brokers.
Brokers like Charles Schwab, Quick & Reilly,
Fidelity, TD Waterhouse, Scott Trade, and others
have e-trading services. Customers can log on to
their account through the Internet and place buy
and sell orders.
Discount brokers also allow you to trade
through a touch-tone telephone. This comes in
handy when the Internet crashes. Generally, com-
missions range from $7 to $20 per trade. These bro-
kerages do not offer buy or sell recommendations.
Instead, they give you access to research material
and allow you to make your own decisions.
SELECTING A BROKERAGE
IF YOU HAVE THE MONEY AND THE TIME to trade, and if you are
willing to learn this profession, it’s time to select a brokerage house. You
will use the facilities provided by the brokerage to make your trades.
There are several types of brokerages. They have the following characteris-
tics and features.
14762_Chua_2p_c03.j.qxp 2/2/07 11:33 AM Page 26
BROKERAGE FIRMS 27
Direct Access BrokersWith the establishment of ECNs came a new breed
of brokerage firms called direct access brokers.
Several large brokerages (e.g., Charles Schwab,
Goldman Sachs, and Datek) now have divisions
that provide direct access to the Nasdaq and the
other exchanges. Direct access is the fastest way to
execute a trade on both Nasdaq and the NYSE.
There are no intermediaries involved. Customers
are responsible for routing their own orders to get
the best possible price. Real-time charting and
software for technical analysis usually come with
the firm’s trading platform. Commissions can
range from $5 to $25 per trade or may be on a per-
share basis for under half a penny a share depend-
ing on the volume of your trades and the firm you
use. This is the only type of brokerage I would use
to day trade.
EXECUTION SPEED
Execution speed is the most important considera-
tion when choosing a direct access broker. High-
speed execution allows you to quickly get into and
out of positions. This gives you control of your
trading. Please note, however, that not all direct
access brokerages are alike. Execution speeds vary
from firm to firm.
You need to search for the broker with the latest,
fastest, and most reliable equipment. A delay of a
couple of seconds or a breakdown can cost you
money. I can’t give you an up-to-date list of the
fastest and most reliable brokers. Trading technol-
ogy is constantly changing, so a fast system today
will be outmoded tomorrow. As a rule, I would
expect a direct access broker to consistently exe-
cute trades within two seconds or less. For a dis-
count brokerage, executions as long as 10 seconds
are too long.
Direct access trading means you are responsible
for routing orders properly. It is not as simple as
clicking a buy or a sell order. Unless you know
what you are doing, direct access trading can be
more of a hindrance than a tool. Make sure you
understand how orders are routed before trading
with real money. Some direct access platforms
have smart order routing whereby the software
chooses the fastest route. Some will even let you
set your preference of where the program should
look first.
RELIABILITY
Fast execution is useless if the brokerage’s trading
system is unreliable. Some firms use software that
has not been debugged. This might cause a system
crash when a large number of orders are placed at
the same time. Bad software could also cause con-
stant Internet disconnects, forcing you to keep log-
ging back on. If the firm’s software does not
interact properly with your computer, the system
may constantly hang up your computer, forcing
you to reboot, a waste of valuable trading time.
Browse trade journals and magazines to find
evaluations of the various brokerages’ reliability.
Talk to other traders; most traders have used sev-
eral different platforms and will give you an hon-
est opinion on which is best.
14762_Chua_2p_c03.j.qxp 2/2/07 11:33 AM Page 27
Sometimes the problem is your computer. You
could be asking your ISP connection to download
more information than it can handle. Your com-
puter will freeze when this happens. It is your
responsibility to know the limits of your computer
system. Today, a telephone-line modem isn’t suit-
able for trading except as backup to a cable
modem, DSL, or other broadband connections. You
may need to buy a new computer to get the speed
and performance you need for trading. If you are
using a system with dual processors, check to see if
the trading platform you use supports them. Com-
puter memory is inexpensive today, so maximize it.
ORDER ROUTING
Here are some questions to ask your broker before
opening an account: Do you execute your own
orders or go through an intermediary? Do you sell
orders through that intermediary? Can I get price
improvement on my orders? Does the platform
have smart routing? Does it support multiple
monitor setups?
Brokers who execute their own orders tend to
have faster executions. Brokers who sell their
orders to intermediaries add precious seconds to
the execution time. The intermediary profits by
trading against your order. Fills are poor and price
improvements are rare. Whatever price improve-
ment the intermediary gets, the intermediary
keeps. The easiest way to know whether a broker-
age sells orders is to look at its financial statement.
If its revenue stream includes an item called “pay-
ments for order flow,” it is selling its orders.
28 SAMMY CHUA’S DAY TRADE YOUR WAY TO FINANCIAL FREEDOM
When you trade with a direct access brokerage,
it is important to know the following: Does the
broker allow you to route an order to an ECN such
as INET or ARCA? How many ECNs is it directly
connected to? Does your direct access broker have
a straight connection to Nasdaq, or does the order
have to hop through several offices before it gets to
Nasdaq?
If you trade heavily, good order routing can
save money. You want as little delay as possible
between you and the market. A good direct access
broker will have a direct connection to several
ECNs. ECNs tend to execute orders a lot quicker
than market makers. The more ECNs you have
direct access to, the more choices you have to get
your orders filled. The more choices you have, the
better your fills will be. At the very minimum, a
brokerage should have direct access to at least the
ARCA, INET, and BRUT ECNs, and preferably all
the available ECNs should be available to you.
The best way to find out whether a direct access
broker has efficient order routing is to send a live
order to the Nasdaq. Usually, I send the order on a
slow-moving stock and place it away from the
inside prices. The order should show up at the
Nasdaq in less than two seconds. Many firms take
eight seconds or more to get an order to Nasdaq.
Make sure you avoid these firms like the plague.
Order routing is getting faster and faster. Cyber-
Trader of Austin, Texas, a subsidiary of The
Charles Schwab Corporation, offers smart orders
using its proprietary CyberExchange order rout-
ing system. It electronically routes orders to the
trading venue that offers the best price and best fill
14762_Chua_2p_c03.j.qxp 2/2/07 11:33 AM Page 28
BROKERAGE FIRMS 29
speeds. These are often ECNs, which not only
eliminate payment for order flow intermediaries,
but also frequently avoid market makers them-
selves.
CyberTrader isn’t alone. TradeStation, RealTick
and E*Trade all offer smart executions. Others
have a policy of not accepting order payments.
Services are improving every year and brokers are
constantly merging. The similarities between full-
service brokers, Internet brokers, information
service providers, and ECNs are becoming more
apparent. Each tries to offer something unique.
PRICE
Price is not as important as speed, reliability, and
order routing. It is more important to get a fast exe-
cution than low commissions. A good execution
will ultimately save more money than a poor one.
I had the following experience with one of my
students. He had worked for a firm with a cheap
commission rate. I went to his home with my lap-
top. I hooked up to a 56-kilobyte modem line and
prepared to trade. He used the firm with the cheap
rate. I used a slightly more expensive firm with
faster executions. After searching for a while, we
finally found a good opportunity.
At my signal, both of us started placing orders.
Our plan was to chase the entry by no more than
$0.25. If the stock moved past our entry by $0.25,
we would cancel our orders. I bought 3,000 shares
of the stock, while my student ended up with noth-
ing. The position moved about $1.50 in my favor,
making some nice money for me. The student
saved $10 in commissions, but missed an opportu-
nity to make $1.50 a share. The worst part was the
missed opportunity.
We do not see a lot of good trading opportuni-
ties each day. It is imperative that we have the
tools to capitalize on those that we see. That is why
cheap commissions are not necessarily cheap.
They usually cost you money in the long run.
There are two ways commissions are calculated
in this industry. The first method is per ticket. A buy
order is one ticket. A sell order is another ticket. A
trade will generally cost you at least two tickets.
Commissions can range from $5 to $20 per ticket,
depending on the brokerage.
In the second method, commissions are figured
on a per-share basis. Depending on your trading
volume, per-share commissions can range from
$0.005 to $0.02 a share. If you buy 200 shares and
your per-share commission is $0.02, your commis-
sion will be $4.00. Don’t forget that you also pay a
commission when you sell. Many companies that
charge a per-share commission also have a mini-
mum charge. Some firms, such as CyberTrader,
will let you choose either a per-share or per-trade
commission.
Commissions can add up to hundreds or even
thousands of dollars every month for active
traders. A balance has to be struck between cheap
commissions and execution speed. There are other
brokerage costs involved when trading. You really
need to read the fine print. For example, there may
be a per-share charge for each share exceeding
1,000 shares if you are on a per-ticket commission.
Some brokerages charge a small fee for cancel,
14762_Chua_2p_c03.j.qxp 2/2/07 11:33 AM Page 29
limit, and stop orders. Manually assisted trades
usually cost more than electronic trades.
Direct access brokers have varying costs for
real-time quotes. Some direct access brokers tack
on additional ECN fees. They charge a low per-
ticket fee, but have costlier ECN fees. Their inten-
tion is to draw you in with the low per-ticket fee
and profit from the higher ECN fees.
Make sure you evaluate the whole commission struc-
ture. Do not just focus on one area.
SERVICE
If you trade from home and experience a computer
crash or a lost Internet connection, your brokerage
should come to the rescue without much delay.
Here’s what you should expect in the form of
backup help: You should be able to call a represen-
tative and execute the trade “by hand.” A good
online broker will reduce the price of the trade if
the problem occurred with the brokerage. The rep-
resentative should not take more than a few min-
utes to answer your call.
A good online brokerage should have a toll-free
service desk that can answer any technical ques-
tion. Even in this day and age, there will be
glitches. The last thing I want to do is become a
computer expert just so I can trade. I leave that to
the technical support team of the brokerage. Some
brokers offer online support directly from the plat-
form using “text chat.” If the support team is
unable to solve the problem, they might want to
log on to your computer remotely and have a look
around. Check to see if that feature is available.
30 SAMMY CHUA’S DAY TRADE YOUR WAY TO FINANCIAL FREEDOM
OTHER ONLINE BROKERAGE FEATURES
Other features you might consider when selecting
a brokerage service include the following:
Products available for trading. Never assume a broker-
age has the product you want to trade. Brokerages that
specialize in equities might not have futures and com-
modities. Many equity brokerages don’t offer options
trading.
Quote services. Delayed quotes are free; real-time
quotes are not. Real-time quotes make all the difference
in a market that changes by the minute. Find out which
brokers offer real-time quotes and how much they charge.
You also want to know if Level II access is available and its
cost.
Charts. Many brokers provide charts or links to charts.
Find out whether the charts are interactive and whether
you can set the parameters. Also, find out whether the
charts are current, whether they load quickly, and whether
they are real-time or 15-minute-delayed.
News and research services. Some brokerages provide
real-time newswire services. Others provide news at their
website. Some brokerages provide extensive research
databases, while others do not.
TYPES OF ACCOUNTS
There are several types of brokerage accounts you
can use to day trade. You can open a corporate
account, a partnership account, a retirement
account, or just a personal account. Most traders
use a personal account for simplicity, but once you
start making money, trading under a corporation
14762_Chua_2p_c03.j.qxp 2/2/07 11:33 AM Page 30
BROKERAGE FIRMS 31
or retirement account does have tax benefits. Con-
sult with your tax advisors before you decide on
one or the other.
There are two major types of trading accounts:
margin accounts and cash accounts.
Margin AccountsA margin account is a leveraged account. The bro-
kerage lends the account owner part of the pur-
chase price of a security. The collateral used for the
loan is the stock itself; no credit check is necessary.
Some securities are not marginable. A security
priced below $5 is a good example. Because they
tend to be high-risk issues, brokerages are unwill-
ing to use the stock as collateral.
You must understand two concepts when using
a margin account: the buying power level and the
margin maintenance requirement. Buying power is
the maximum dollar amount of stocks you can
purchase on a given day. The maintenance margin is
the amount of cash you must have in your account
to continue to hold a position.
If an account is not being used for day trading
or pattern trading, the buying power level is two
to one. If you have $10,000 in the account, you
can buy up to $20,000 of marginable stocks. This
means you can borrow up to 100 percent of the
cash in the account. If the maintenance level is 30
percent of the value of the stock, you will need
$6,000 in cash to keep the $20,000 position.
If the value of the stock drops, and the cash in
the account drops below the maintenance level,
the owner will be asked to put in more cash or sell
a portion of the stock. This is a margin call. In other
words, someone will call you because your margin
is insufficient. This is not a call I like to receive.
Here’s an example of how a margin call could
occur: You buy 100 shares of a $200 stock using
your margin account. The price drops from $200 to
$150. This is a $50 loss per share and a $5,000 loss
of capital. The account now has $5,000 left ($10,000
original capital − $5,000 loss), and the total stock
value is $15,000 ($150 × 100 shares). The mainte-
nance margin is $4,500 ($15,000 × 30%). At this
point, the capital is still higher than the mainte-
nance margin, so a margin call will not be gener-
ated. Any further drop in the price of the stock will
trigger a call.
The buying power for a day trading account is
even greater. New regulations allow a four-to-one
margin on day trading accounts. The trader must
have a minimum balance of $25,000 in the account.
The maintenance margin requirement on the new
four-to-one margin rule has not changed. A day
trader who uses up his or her buying power and
does not sell stock to generate cash will get a mar-
gin call. This is because the maintenance margin is
at 30 percent, while the capital available is only 25
percent of the buying power.
How does the SEC define a day trader or pat-
tern trader? The SEC defines a day trade as a pur-
chase and sale or sale and purchase of the same
security on the same day in the same account. If
you go long on a position and close it the same day
or go short on a position and close it the same day,
you are day trading. A day trader must trade at
least four times in five business days. However, if
this trading does not exceed 6 percent of the total
14762_Chua_2p_c03.j.qxp 2/2/07 11:33 AM Page 31
trading activity for a five-day period, the account
is not considered a day trading account.
A margin account is needed if you want to short
stocks. (Shorting is explained in the next section.)
A trader who fits the definition of a day trader
must have $25,000 minimum equity in his or her
account to day trade.
Cash AccountsIn a cash account, your capital equals your buy-
ing power. Cash accounts are mostly used by
long-term investors. Retirement accounts are cash
accounts. If you want to day trade, make sure you
do not have a cash account.
Certain trading products, because they are con-
sidered risky, must be traded in a cash account.
Options transactions are a good example. Options
are extremely risky. Unlike stocks, they have no
inherent value. Options are only a right to buy or
to sell. The owner of an option does not own any-
thing except that right. Options are not worth
much as collateral. Brokerages are therefore
unwilling to extend margin against these holdings.
TYPES OF POSITIONS
There are two types of positions that a trader can
have. They are the long position and the short posi-
tion. The market allows traders to profit in either
direction of the market. When the market heads
up, a trader can go long on a position and profit
from it. The trader buys the stock, holds it, and
sells it later at a higher price. Thus, traders are to
be long on a position if they own the stock. Their
32 SAMMY CHUA’S DAY TRADE YOUR WAY TO FINANCIAL FREEDOM
profit comes from buying the stock at a low price
and selling it at a higher price. Losses occur when
the selling price is lower than the purchase price.
When the market heads down, traders can make
money by going short. A trader sells the stock at a
high price and later buys it back at a lower price.
The profits and losses are no different than a long
position. Losses come from paying more for the
stock than the original sale price.
The only difference between the two positions
is the timing sequence. On a long position, the
trader buys the stock first and sells later. With a
short position, the trader sells the stock first and
buys it back later.
Most newcomers have a hard time grasping the
concept of shorting. They wonder how it is possi-
ble to sell something you do not own. The key to
making this possible is the intermediary: your bro-
kerage.
To sell something they do not own, traders do
the following: After borrowing the stock, they sell
the stock, getting cash in return. But they still owe a
debt to the brokerage. The debt is not in the form of
cash. It’s in the form of the shares they borrowed.
The only way a trader can repay this debt is to buy
the shares and give them back to the brokerage. It is
only after the debt is repaid that a profit is realized.
To clarify this concept, here’s an example of a
successful short trade: You are a trader. You think
IBM, currently trading at $125, is going to fall. You
borrow 100 shares from your brokerage. You sell
the stock immediately, getting cash in return. You
still must return the 100 shares you borrowed. You
will do this after the price falls.
14762_Chua_2p_c03.j.qxp 2/2/07 11:33 AM Page 32
BROKERAGE FIRMS 33
When you sold the stock you borrowed it was
priced at $125 per share. Thus, you received
$12,500 in cash. Remember, you think IBM is going
to fall. You do not return the shares to the broker-
age right away. You let it fall. When it hits $100,
you buy 100 shares so you can return them. You
have already sold 100 shares at $125, getting
$12,500. Now you buy 100 shares at $100, spend-
ing $10,000. Remember, you sold 100 shares for
$12,500. Then you bought 100 shares for $10,000
and returned them to the lender. You keep the dif-
ference of $2,500. Buying the shares to return them
is called covering your short.
To short successfully, you borrow shares, sell
them at a high price, and then buy them back at a
lower price. It is sell first, buy later.As a trader, short-
ing has to be part of your strategy. If it is not, you will
severely limit your moneymaking potential.
Shorting GuidelinesHere are the regulations for shorting. Short sales
can occur only on an uptick. The Nasdaq and the
stock exchanges define uptick in different terms.
For exchanges like the NYSE, an uptick is
defined by the time and sales or the last trans-
acted price. If the last price is higher than the
previous one, then you have an uptick on the
stock. For the Nasdaq, the uptick is determined
by the inside bid price. If the current inside bid
price is higher than the previous inside bid price,
then you have an uptick. In both cases, short
sales can happen only when the stock price is ris-
ing, even if just briefly. This is a safety measure
to prevent another stock crash like the one in
1987. If stocks could be shorted as they fall, chaos
would follow.
In order to short a stock, it must be available for
borrowing from your brokerage firm or clearing-
house. Stocks that are thinly traded are usually not
available for selling short. This happens because
the brokerage cannot obtain the stocks you want to
short. Another problem might arise after you short
a stock. As you know, in order to facilitate a short
sale, the brokerage must first borrow and then
lend you the securities that you sell short.
From time to time, a brokerage will receive a
recall notice on the shares it lent to you. If the bro-
kerage is unable to obtain replacement shares to
secure your position, it will sell the short position
in your account on the open market at the current
market price. As the account holder, you will be
responsible for any resulting loss or costs incurred
by the brokerage.
A short sale is always handled as a margin
transaction. Shorting involves borrowing stocks,
and only margin account holders are allowed to
borrow. The current margin interest rate is applied
for however long the short position is open.
The margin maintenance requirement is a little
higher for selling short than it is for a long posi-
tion. Often, brokers will not charge margin interest
on short trades that are opened and closed the
same day. New issues typically cannot be shorted
during their first 30 days of trading.
Please note, as of this writing the SEC is proposing
to remove the uptick rule. Presently, you can short
on a downtick on ARCA and INET ECNs, and both
the Nasdaq and NYSE are testing feasibility on a
14762_Chua_2p_c03.j.qxp 2/2/07 11:33 AM Page 33
limited list of stocks. Check with your broker for the
latest rules and regulations.
Dangers of Short SellingA widely perceived misconception is that shorting
can lead to disaster. This is true, but only if you let
it be true. When you buy a stock, you risk the
money you paid for the stock. With short selling,
you risk an unlimited amount of money. If the
stock you shorted rises instead of dropping, you
will be responsible for that increase in price. This
can indeed lead to a disastrous loss.
But again, this will happen only if you let it hap-
pen. Nothing should stop you from quickly clos-
ing a short position if it goes bad. Many short
traders do not have an exit plan. An exit plan
means setting an exit point. If you short a stock at
$35, plan to get out of the position if it rises to a cer-
tain point, say $36. Do not attempt shorting with-
out an exit strategy.
TYPES OF TRADING ORDERS
A day trader has a variety of trading orders to
choose from. Two factors determine which type of
order should be used: timing and price. Timing is
the length of time an order is left open. You can
leave an order open briefly for a day or longer.
The Market OrderThe simplest form of order is the market order. It is
an order that must be executed at the best price
available as soon as the order reaches the market
maker or trading floor. No price is specified. The
transaction has to be made at the current market
34 SAMMY CHUA’S DAY TRADE YOUR WAY TO FINANCIAL FREEDOM
price. I use market orders to get out of losing posi-
tions. When a stock hits my stop-loss, I get out
immediately at the market price. If I wait, I could
lose even more. I also use market orders at the
beginning of an up move. If an uptrending stock
has made a nice pullback and is beginning to turn
up, I use a market order to catch a ride on the
upswing.
Market orders are susceptible to slippage. Let’s
say the stock is moving up after a pullback. This is
a buying opportunity. But a lot of buyers will jump
into the stock. Because demand for the stock is
high, the price will move up quickly. You will get
filled because you have entered a market order.
But the price will be higher than you thought. This
is called slippage, and it applies to both winning
and losing trades. When you want to take a profit
on a winning trade, others will be doing the same.
When you want to get out of a losing trade, other
traders will have the same objective. The key is to
enter your market orders early. Never wait or hes-
itate. If not, the slippage can be extreme.
A market order is good for the duration of the
trading day. An order placed after the close of trad-
ing is good for the next trading day. It’s a simple
system that works well. Never deal with a firm
that takes too long to fill a market order. It could be
trading against your order, putting you on the los-
ing end of the trade. Market orders should be filled
within one or two minutes.
The Limit OrderA limit order guarantees a price. You literally place
a limit on the buy or sell price. If a better price than
your limit price is available, you’ll get that price.
14762_Chua_2p_c03.j.qxp 2/2/07 11:33 AM Page 34
BROKERAGE FIRMS 35
As you will see next, limit orders do not guaran-
tee that your trade will be executed.
The Buy Limit OrderThis is an order to buy shares at a stipulated price.
The limit price can be higher or lower than the cur-
rent market price. I use buy limit orders to take
advantage of pullbacks. If a stock currently at $35
is dropping, I place a buy limit order lower than
that price. When the stock hits the lower price, the
order is executed. Computerized order books send
these orders to specialists and market makers, or
they are executed automatically on the ECN. If the
price you set is not reached, there is no execution.
I also use this strategy when I am exiting a short
position. I place a below-the-market order and
wait for the price to drop far enough to buy back
the shares I shorted. Again, you should place the
order early. Do not hesitate.
I also place buy limit orders at a higher-than-
market price when I am opening a position. Here’s
an example of this strategy: A stock is trading at
$35. I expect the stock to run to $36, giving me a
profit of $1. I send a buy limit order at $35.25. The
order will be filled only at $35.25 or lower. If the
price goes above $35.25, my order will not be
filled. This keeps me from paying too much, and
thus I make a small profit. If the stock runs up
quickly, I will cancel the order and wait for a pull-
back.
The Sell or Short Limit OrderSell or short limit orders are similar to buy limit
orders. But they set a sell or short price target
instead of a buy price target. Again, the limit price
can be either higher or lower than the market. If I
have a long position and the stock is climbing, I
place a limit order to sell at a price higher than the
market. Once the price hits my limit price, the
order will be executed. I do not like placing limit
orders to exit a losing position if it is higher than
the market price. They tend not to get executed,
leaving me worse off than if I had simply placed a
market sell order to get out.
I use limit orders when I enter a short position.
This prevents me from getting into a stock at the
end of a run, leaving me with little or no profit. My
limit price is determined by how much profit I
expected, but I tend to limit my price to $0.25 away
from my entry point. Don’t forget, you can also
short using a limit order that is higher than the
market price. You are simply waiting for the price
to bounce up to a resistance point before entering
your short position.
Stop OrderStop orders are the most important type of order.
They can get you into favorable positions and out
of losing positions when you can’t watch the mar-
ket. They allow traders to let profits run on the
upside and limit losses on the downside. Stop
orders say, in effect, when the market hits a certain
price, “Stop here” and enter a market order. A mar-
ket order becomes a live order only when that stop
price is hit.
The Buy Stop OrderA buy stop is a buy order that becomes an active
market order only when the stock rises to a specified
14762_Chua_2p_c03.j.qxp 2/2/07 11:33 AM Page 35
stop price. The stop price is always above the cur-
rent market price.
A sample order is as follows: “Buy 1,000 Coca-
Cola at $45 stop.” This does not mean you’ll get
Coke at $45. It means that it will become a market
order starting at $45.
Investors use this method to buy stocks that are
rising. They believe the upswing will continue and
they want to buy before the price goes too high.
Buy stop orders also protect profits in a short posi-
tion. Let’s say you sold Coke short at $47 and it
drops to $44.50. Then Coke announces that earn-
ings will double in the next quarter. The price is
going to skyrocket. If you had set a buy stop order
$45, you would be out of the position when the
stock hit that price. This would protect most of
your hard-won profit. Buy stop orders are a safety
net for short sellers.
The Sell Stop OrderSell stops, often called stop-loss orders, are safety
nets for long positions. The order is always set
below the current market price. It is used to protect
profits and to limit losses in a long position. This
order is the opposite of the buy stop order. It
becomes a market order only when the price of the
stock declines to your “stop” price.
For example, you bought Coke at $45 and it’s
now gone up to $54. You want to make sure it
doesn’t drop while you’re not watching, so you
place a sell stop at $51 to protect your profit. Your
order will now be as follows:
“Sell 1,000 Coca-Cola at $51 stop.” If the stock
drops back to $51 or lower, your shares will go up
36 SAMMY CHUA’S DAY TRADE YOUR WAY TO FINANCIAL FREEDOM
for sale, protecting some of your profits. In this
example, you could also place a sell stop order at
any price below your entry price of $45, say $41.
This order will go into effect when the stock price
drops to $41. At that point, it becomes a market
order to sell. This limits your loss. With this order
the upside potential is not limited. Only the down-
side is limited with a sell stop order.
The Short StopThis is an order to go short at the market price
when the stock falls to a certain level. The idea is to
go short on a stock that is declining in price, ride
the selling pressure down, and buy the stock back
at a cheaper price.
The Stop-Limit OrderThis is a good order to use when you enter a posi-
tion. It is both a stop order and a limit order. It can
be used for a buy order or a short order. When a
stop-limit order is used, a limit order is triggered
when a stop price is reached.
For example, you entered the following order
for Coca-Cola: “Buy 1,000 Coca-Cola stop $45,
limit $45.15.” Coke is floundering at $44.50, but
you think it might go higher. If Coke finally
“breaks resistance” and moves up to $45 or higher,
then you’ll buy at $45.15 or lower, but not higher
than $45.15. With such restrictions on your order,
however, it may go past $45.15 without there being
enough stock at your price to fill the order. Your
order might not get filled. But overall, the stop-
limit order prevents the trader from chasing an
entry beyond a reasonable price.
14762_Chua_2p_c03.j.qxp 2/2/07 11:33 AM Page 36
BROKERAGE FIRMS 37
The market is like an auction. Bidders at auction
can get caught up in the hype and buy an item at
an unreasonably high price. If you set a limit price
prior to the auction, you will not overpay. The
same is true with stocks. You will not overpay if
you set a predetermined maximum price. The limit
order ensures that you have the chance to get in on
a run, while the stop order allows you to wait for
confirmation and then enter as a run begins.
Bear in mind that the limit price on a buy stop-
limit order does not have to be higher than the stop
price. It can be lower than the stop price. This
allows the trader to buy on pullbacks, but you do
run the risk of not getting a fill when these restric-
tions are placed. For a short order, the order would
be as follows:
“Short 1,000 Coca-Cola stop $45, limit $44.85.”
This order says when the price of Coca-Cola
declines to $45, send a short limit order out at
$44.85. This will also ensure that the trader does
not get filled too far away from the desired short
entry price.
Again, the limit price does not have to be lower
or higher than the stop price. It can be anywhere
you choose to place it. The price you choose will
depend on the current bid and ask and also the
price action.
The Cancellation OrderIf you change your mind after opening a position,
you must place a cancellation order to close out the
position. A cancellation that arrives after a transac-
tion is completed is not valid. You will be liable
for the results of the transaction. By the time your
cancellation is executed, the market may have
changed and you might incur a loss. Be careful
with cancellations.
All brokerages and trading systems allow order
cancellation. Simply identify the order and hit the
cancel button. If your broker charges a fee for can-
cellations, I would change brokerages. Some bro-
kerages will falsely tell you the Nasdaq charges a
$0.25 cancellation fee. This is not true! The broker-
age keeps the money. I trade only with firms that
do not charge a fee for order cancellation.
Cancellation should work just as fast as the
original order placement. Orders reaching an
exchange in seconds can be canceled in seconds.
But when markets and electronic trading systems
are caught in a traffic jam, cancellations will be
slow. Be warned, your cancellation may arrive
after the order is filled.
Market orders are executed quickly. You proba-
bly will not have the time to cancel the order. Limit
orders give you more time to change your mind. I
use cancel orders to speed up market orders sent to
the NYSE. If a specialist is ignoring my order, a
cancel order usually gets the job done. Remember,
specialists and market makers make money by
playing the spread. They want as many orders as
possible.
More Order TermsSome of the following terms involve the length of
time an order is left open. Some involve execution.
Good-till-canceled order. A GTC order stays on the
books until it’s executed. You might forget about it, but the
market won’t.
14762_Chua_2p_c03.j.qxp 2/2/07 11:33 AM Page 37
Good-for-the-day order. A GTD order stays open until the
end of the day. It is automatically canceled if it is not exe-
cuted during the day. This is a good strategy, because you
have no idea what the market will do the next day.
Fill-or-kill order. An FOK order is killed or canceled if it is
not filled immediately.
All-or-none order. For an AON order, the whole order has
to be taken or it will be rejected.
38 SAMMY CHUA’S DAY TRADE YOUR WAY TO FINANCIAL FREEDOM
Immediate-or-cancel order. An IOC order is an instruc-
tion added to an order that requires execution at the
stated price for as many shares as can be filled immedi-
ately. The order for shares that are not filled is canceled.
Market-at-open order. This is an order to buy or to sell
immediately at the open.
Market-at-close order. This is an order to buy or sell as
close to the end of the trading day as possible. ●$
14762_Chua_2p_c03.j.qxp 2/2/07 11:33 AM Page 38
CHAPTER 4
Direct AccessOrder EntrySystem
• Nasdaq Direct
• SuperMontage
• TotalView
• ECNs
• SuperDOT
• Order Execution Systems Review
14762_Chua_2p_c04.j.qxp 2/2/07 11:33 AM Page 39
There are a number of electronic systems for
directly buying and selling stocks within the mar-
ket. The main systems are:
● Through the market makers participating in the
Nasdaq Market Center
● ECNs
● SuperDOT
40 SAMMY CHUA’S DAY TRADE YOUR WAY TO FINANCIAL FREEDOM
NASDAQ DIRECT
The Nasdaq Market Center is where market mak-
ers conduct the business of buying and selling
stocks. The Market Center is a fully integrated
order display, execution, and trade reporting sys-
tem for all securities listed on Nasdaq National
Market®, Nasdaq SmallCap MarketSM, NYSE, and
THIS CHAPTER CONCERNS ONLY THOSE with a direct access
trading account. With direct access, there is no intermediary between
you and the market. Some trading platforms, like CyberTrader Pro,
will select the best venue for your order automatically, using “smart routing.”
With others, you need to do the work manually. Either way, you need to
know, at a minimum, the basics if you want to use direct access brokerages.
Remember, confirmations through the direct access system can take as little as
0.5 seconds! Each venue has its own rules, risks, and characteristics. A fre-
quently asked question is, “Which venue is best overall, and which works
best in a fast-moving market?” Unfortunately there are no cut-and-dried
answers, which is why it is a must to familiarize yourself with all the venues
that are available to you through your broker. The more knowledge you have
about direct access, the better off you will be. Again, keep in mind that things
are changing rapidly in this business. As always, check with your broker for
the latest. As of this writing, Nasdaq is awaiting regulatory approval for its
purchase of INET; you should expect this to bring more changes.
14762_Chua_2p_c04.j.qxp 2/2/07 11:33 AM Page 40
DIRECT ACCESS ORDER ENTRY SYSTEM 41
Amex. The Market Center offers trade executions
and reporting for more than 6,700 securities.
SuperMontageSM is Nasdaq’s display and order
execution system designed to help reduce frag-
mentation, provide best execution, expand the
number of choices to market participants, and bet-
ter handle the growth of the market. The order
routing and execution segment of SuperMontage
replaces SuperSOES and SOESSM orders. The
basics of SuperMontage are discussed next.
SUPERMONTAGE
The SuperMontage system will attempt to match
your order with the best price available at the time
it is received. Odd lots are accepted, but will be
grouped with other odd lots to create round lots
before being executed. Dual-listed securities can
be round lots only if sent to SuperMontage.
SuperMontage does not use a tier limit system.
As such, tier limit restrictions are no longer appli-
cable for any Nasdaq National Market Securities
(NMS) or Nasdaq SmallCap Market securities
(SC). Over-the-Counter Bulletin Board (OTCBB)
stocks cannot be traded via SuperMontage order
routing.
Any portion of a SuperMontage order that
attempts to execute “10% + $.01” away from the
inside market at the time of entry will be rejected.
For example, in stock ABCD, the current inside bid
is $10.00. You enter a market sell order for 5,000
shares. There are currently 4,000 shares bidding
between $8.99 and $10.00, with another 100 shares
available at $8.98. Based on the preceding formula
[$10.00 −($10.00 × .10) − $.01 = $8.99], the threshold
price will be $8.99. Therefore, 4,000 shares of your
order will execute, and the new inside bid will be
$8.98. The remaining 1,000 shares of your order
will be rejected, as there is no additional liquidity
at or above the threshold bid price.
Market participants are obligated to comply
with the “Firm Quote Rule,” which means they
must execute an order presented at a price at least
as favorable as its displayed quote, up to its
quoted size. This is also called a liability order.
Transaction hours are 9:30 A.M. to 4:00 P.M. eastern
time.
Market makers and ECNs can post to Level II
anonymously by sending nonattributed orders to
the market. Nonattributed orders are displayed in
the Level II montage under the size identifier. For
each price level, all nonattributed orders are aggre-
gated under this identifier; however, unless you
subscribe to Nasdaq TotalView, size will display
only one quote on each side of the montage—the
best-priced, nonattributable bid and ask in the sys-
tem. If your order is filled by a nonattributed par-
ticipant, you will see the participant’s ID when the
transaction is complete.
Another type of SuperMontage order is the
SuperMontage Directed order. SuperMontage
Directed sends orders to market makers and
ECNs, either directly or broadcast to all available
participants at once. Order quantity must be 100
shares over the size the market maker is posting.
Otherwise, your order may be rejected. For exam-
ple, if a market maker is posting 900 shares and
you wish to purchase 1,000, you may send your
14762_Chua_2p_c04.j.qxp 2/2/07 11:33 AM Page 41
order for 1,000. If the market maker is posting
1,000, you must send your order for 1,100, or find
a market maker who is posting 900. No counter-
party is obligated to fill SuperMontage Directed
orders. There is no tier limit on a SuperMontage
Directed order. If your order is directed to a market
maker at its posted price, it has 15 seconds to fill the
order, reject the order, or move off of the price.
Orders cannot be canceled for 5 seconds after be-
ing placed. The transaction hours are 9:00 A.M. to
6:30 P.M. eastern time.
TOTALVIEW
Market maker activity can be viewed on all
Level II screens. Level II shows each Nasdaq par-
ticipant’s best bid and ask and the size available.
Some brokers charge a fee for Level II. Besides just
basic Level II, some offer a new product from
Nasdaq called TotalView. TotalView shows up to
five quotes per market participant per side. (Note
that participants are not obligated to post five
quotes, but they do have the option.) In other
words, TotalView has the same data as Level II,
plus up to four more quotes per side per partici-
pant. TotalView also includes an aggregate of the
first five price levels and the total number of shares
at each price.
Figure 4.1 shows a Level II screen with
TotalView for Netease.com Inc. At the top of the
actual Level II montage you can see the five levels
of aggregated quotes. Below that, notice that mar-
ket participant LEHM is shown at two levels on
the bid side and two levels on the ask side. Notice
42 SAMMY CHUA’S DAY TRADE YOUR WAY TO FINANCIAL FREEDOM
also “SIZE,” where market makers are posting
nonattributed orders.
ECNs
It’s time to discuss ECNs in greater detail. They
were created in response to a growing need to cre-
ate fair and efficient trading that was more accessi-
ble to individuals. They came about after the SEC
passed the order handling rules of 1997.
ECNs allow Nasdaq customers, traders, or in-
4.1 Level II with Nasdaq TotalView®
14762_Chua_2p_c04.j.qxp 2/2/07 11:33 AM Page 42
DIRECT ACCESS ORDER ENTRY SYSTEM 43
vestors like you and me to trade directly with each
other or to place orders directly into the marketplace.
This process eliminates the intermediaries. In the
beginning they handled fewer than 5 percent of all
OTC trades. They now control over 35 percent of
Nasdaq volume, and that number continues to grow.
In 1998, the SEC passed a regulation called Alterna-
tive Trading Systems (ATS). This allows ECNs, such
as ARCA, REDI, and others, to become electronic
securities exchanges. As for-profit exchanges, each
ECN has its own individual trading system and
computer algorithms. Understanding how each
ECN works, and under what situations each works
best, will enable you to get in and out of positions
quickly. As a trader, my biggest concern is liquidity.
Liquidity is the ability to quickly turn stocks into
cash. The ECN that provides the best liquidity and
reliability is the one you should use. When trading
on an order-matching ECN, volume is critical. Oth-
erwise, there will be little liquidity for the trader. A
computer algorithm system is not self-contained.
This type of ECN will automatically search the entire
market to get the order filled. It literally helps the
trader decide where to go for liquidity.
The list of available ECNs is constantly chang-
ing due to failures, consolidation, mergers, and
acquisitions. What is most important is which ones
are offered by your direct access broker. The main
ECNs as of this writing are ARCA, INET, BRUT,
ATTN, and BTRD. BRUT is now owned by the
Nasdaq; ARCA has merged with the NYSE; and
INET has also been acquired by Nasdaq and is
awaiting regulatory approval. Following is a brief
description of the main ECNs: INET, ARCA,
BRUT, and ATTN. Not all the order types are avail-
able through all direct access brokers, and the
hours may vary from broker to broker.
ARCAGerald Putnam formed Archipelago in 1996 in
response to the new order handling rules imple-
mented by the SEC. It began in 1997 as one of the
four original ECNs approved by the SEC. Archi-
pelago is accessible to traders, easy to use, and
inexpensive. It also has a great deal of liquidity.
Codeveloped by Townsend Analytics, Ltd., and
Terra Nova Trading, Archipelago allows traders to
post bids and asks into Nasdaq Level II and on
some stocks in the NYSE. Archipelago also oper-
ates on a computer algorithm. Best execution is
facilitated by its proprietary SmartBook technol-
ogy, which looks for the best price for an order
internally or externally. This book server, the heart
of the Archipelago system, maintains a current
real-time account of all bids and offers for each
Nasdaq stock. If an incoming order crosses or
locks an existing internal order, the order is exe-
cuted immediately. If no crosses or locks occur,
and the order reaches the top of the Archipelago
book, it will be sent to Nasdaq for display. The best
bid and ask posting 100 or more shares will post on
Level II if it does not cross or lock the market.
Hours of operation are 4:00 A.M. to 9:30 P.M. eastern
time. Limit orders can be entered and will be
queued until the limit order auction at 4 A.M. east-
ern time. Individual brokers may have different
hours of operations. For more information go to
ARCA’s web site at www.tradearca.com.
14762_Chua_2p_c04.j.qxp 2/2/07 11:33 AM Page 43
INETINET is the result of a merger between Instinet and
Island ECNs. Instinet is the original ECN. It was
founded in 1969 and acquired by the Reuters Group
in 1987. Established in 1997, Island’s mission was to
provide investors with an open, transparent, and
fully accessible marketplace. It operated on one
simple principle: It automatically matched buy and
sell limit orders for equities. It was inexpensive,
easy, reliable, and liquid. It changed the way every-
one looked at day trading. Together now as INET,
this is one of the most powerful ECNs available.
Where the acquisition by the Nasdaq will take it is
anyone’s guess, but odds are it will be good for the
day trader. INET is an order matching system and
accessible only to other INET subscribers. Orders
not immediately matched are added to the INET
order book, a database of available orders, where
they wait to be matched in price-time priority.
Orders will not be routed to other market partici-
pants for execution. All INET subscribers are
anonymous; no subscriber’s identity is disclosed
before, during, or after an execution. The top INET
book bid and ask quotes are displayed on Level II
with the INET or CINN identifier. Currently, hours
are 7:00 A.M. to 8:00 P.M. For more information, go to
the INET web site at www.inetats.com.
BrutIn its early phases, when it was owned by Brass
Utilities, this ECN catered mostly to institutional
investors and broker-dealers. Now, after being
purchased by the Nasdaq, it is available to all
traders. Brut offers broad market access, with
44 SAMMY CHUA’S DAY TRADE YOUR WAY TO FINANCIAL FREEDOM
routing to all major destinations. In addition, all
firms, both market maker and order entry, can now
post orders in the National Market System using
Brut. Firms can use Brut to access the NYSE via its
DOT router and access the Amex and regional
exchanges. Your DOT orders will sweep the Brut,
Nasdaq Market Center, and INET exchange-listed
books before being sent to the floor if not already
filled. For more in-depth information on the vari-
ety of Brut order types your broker may offer, go to
the Brut web site at www.nasdaqtrader.com/
trader/tradingservices/productservices/product-
descriptions/brutdescription.stm.
ATTNAttain (ATTN) was introduced in 1988 by All-Tech.
It was founded by Harvey Houtkin, often referred
to as the father of electronic stock trading. Houtkin
has long advocated the reform of investing rules
and regulations. ATTN was acquired by Domestic
Securities and then, more recently, by Knight Capi-
tal Group, Inc. Like INET, Attain is strictly an order
matching system. Orders that are not matched in
the ATTN book will be displayed on Level II if the
order is for more than 100 shares and at the inside
bid or ask and if it does not cross or lock the mar-
ket. Hours are 8:05 A.M. to 6:30 P.M. eastern time. At
this time, ATTN accepts only limit orders.
SUPERDOT
Electronic access to the listed markets is evolving
rapidly. Currently, SuperDOT is the most common
way for traders using a direct access platform to
14762_Chua_2p_c04.j.qxp 2/2/07 11:33 AM Page 44
DIRECT ACCESS ORDER ENTRY SYSTEM 45
trade listed securities. SuperDOT is an electronic
means of gaining access to the listed markets. It is
responsible for the vast majority of all orders on the
NYSE. SuperDOT can handle up to 99,999 shares at
a time. It gives individual investor orders of less
than 2,100 shares priority over the large institu-
tional orders. It links the member firms directly to
the specialists who will rapidly execute orders.
The specialists’ job is to pair orders, fill orders
from the inventory, or place orders on the limit
order book. The purpose of the limit order book is
to give specialists time to organize the book while
establishing an orderly market.
In recent times, third markets like the Chicago,
Philadelphia, and the Pacific Stock Exchanges
have entered the picture by guaranteeing to fill
orders at the best price on the NYSE. Day trading
firms across the country can access the specialists
through these third markets. With more and more
listed securities trading on ECNs, and with the
merger of ARCA and the NYSE, things will be
changing rapidly.
ORDER EXECUTION SYSTEMS REVIEW
A market order is an order executed at current bid or ask
price.
A limit order sets a limit on the price that the trader is will-
ing to buy or sell.
The SuperDOT system is for executing a trade on the NYSE.
A trader trading on the Nasdaq has several order routes to
choose from.
The easiest routing method is the intelligent ECN. These
systems use a smart computer algorithm to help the
traders send their orders properly.
INET ECN has plenty of volume to provide good liquidity,
but it does not work on a smart computer algorithm.
ECNs such as ARCA, Brut, and NTRD work on smart com-
puter algorithms. Each has its own individual designs.
When canceling an order, the order remains active until
actually canceled by the exchange. An order can be filled
even after a trader has hit the cancel button.
Pay close attention to the spread between bid and ask,
especially if you are placing a market order.
Make sure you know the fee structure at your broker-
dealer.
Remember, each venue has its own characteris-
tics, rules, and risks. Commission charges may
vary depending on what route you choose for
your order. Some routes may be faster in different
markets. Price, volume, fees, and liquidity are all
things that have to be considered, sometimes very
rapidly as you make your trading decisions. Make
sure you understand all these concepts completely
to prevent any surprises as you begin trading
using direct access. Also remember that this infor-
mation is changing rapidly; make sure you have
the latest! ●$
14762_Chua_2p_c04.j.qxp 2/2/07 11:33 AM Page 45
14762_Chua_2p_c04.j.qxp 2/2/07 11:33 AM Page 46
CHAPTER 5
Elements ofSuccessfulTrading
• Minimum Requirements to Begin Trading
• Psychology of Trading
• Risk Management
• Trading Methodology
14762_Chua_2p_c05.j.qxp 2/2/07 11:34 AM Page 47
CapitalTo trade, of course, you need money, or capital, as
it’s called. If you want to trade stocks, you will
need from $30,000 to $100,000. Adequate capital-
ization is one of the keys to successful trading. Too
many traders start out with inadequate capital.
They start with less than $30,000 and hope to make
a living immediately. This is possible, but highly
unlikely.
It generally takes a few months for a trader to
become successful. Adequate capitalization allows
the trader to survive this learning curve. It’s best
not to become involved with day trading if you
cannot survive this period without dipping into
reserves. It’s also wise for beginning traders to
keep their jobs until they start making money in
day trading. This lessens the pressure to make
money immediately.
TimeYou may not think that time is an important con-
sideration, but I urge you not to overlook this fac-
tor. Trading takes a lot of time. It will take you
away from your family, friends, and leisure activi-
ties. Are you willing to make this sacrifice? Make
sure you have the support of loved ones before
48 SAMMY CHUA’S DAY TRADE YOUR WAY TO FINANCIAL FREEDOM
you begin. It will make your life easier. Reading
books and attending seminars and conventions
takes time. Doing research and analysis also takes
time.
KnowledgeKnowledge comes from books, seminars, and talk-
ing with others. Many people skip the educational
process and jump right into trading. Most of them
fail. We are not built to trade. Our psychological
makeup is such that we will almost always make
the wrong decisions. Make sure you learn how to
trade from successful traders. If you imitate their
methods, your chances of success will greatly
increase. As you progress from beginner to profes-
sional, your quest for knowledge will continue. It
never ends. Isn’t that wonderful? In this profes-
sion, there is always something new for us to
understand and conquer.
Your ComputerHere are the minimum requirements for your
computer. Keep in mind that technology makes
quantum leaps every year. By the time you read
this list, it could be outdated—but we’ll include it
anyway.
MINIMUM REQUIREMENTS TO BEGIN TRADING
THE FOLLOWING RESOURCES ARE the bare minimum that you
need to begin trading for a living.
14762_Chua_2p_c05.j.qxp 2/2/07 11:34 AM Page 48
ELEMENTS OF SUCCESSFUL TRADING 49
1.0-gigahertz Pentium processor
512 megabytes of memory
50-gig hard drive
Windows XP
Networking card
CD-ROM
19-inch monitor (LCD)
Uninterruptible power supply (UPS)
When you buy a computer, get the best you
can afford without hurting your trading account.
Make sure it has expansion slots so it can grow
with your needs. As a beginner, you might start
out with only one monitor. Later, you might want
to add more memory and an extra monitor. Make
sure this is possible with the computer system
that you buy. My current system has four 21-inch
monitors on two video cards, 512 megs of RAM,
a networking card, cable access, CD-ROM, and
a UPS.
Internet ConnectionToday, nothing less than cable or DSL will work. A
lot of traders have both for redundancy. The shear
amount of data that traders demand requires a
broadband connection to the Internet.
Cable modems are available in most areas of the
country. These modems come from your cable TV
company. High-speed DSL Internet connections
are also available in most areas. Your phone com-
pany usually provides this service. Two-way satel-
lite connections will work on some platforms, but
usually won’t be supported by the broker; in addi-
tion, because of the distance the signal is traveling,
a slight delay is present.
A T1 line connection is also an option, but it is
expensive. Installation and monthly maintenance
costs are high. Make sure your trading is profitable
before venturing into such a connection.
PSYCHOLOGY OF TRADING
There are three key elements to trading success.
They are psychology, risk management, and trading
methodology. It is critical to understand how inter-
related all three pieces are. You absolutely cannot
have success without one or the other. Each ele-
ment has to play a part in the way you trade. Oth-
erwise, you are building a house of cards. First,
let’s look at the psychology of trading.
Trading is a psychological process. The way you
analyze the market and reach conclusions depends
on your past experiences. The market is an inani-
mate object. It has no feeling. It simply exists. Peo-
ple make judgments about everything. To some, a
mountain is beautiful. To others, a mountain is just
a big rock. Depending on your point of view, a
glass of water can be half empty or half full.
The same is true in trading. If your past experi-
ence has been good, you will see the market as an
opportunity. You will have the confidence to act
quickly. If your past experiences have been bad,
you will see the market in a negative light. Fear
and indecision will control your decisions. Your
mind will focus on the things that could go wrong.
You will hesitate, waiting for more confirmation
that you are making the right trade. Often, you
14762_Chua_2p_c05.j.qxp 2/2/07 11:34 AM Page 49
will not trade at all. You will sit on the sidelines
and watch opportunities disappear.
To trade successfully, you must rise above your
past experiences. If not, they will govern the way
you trade. And they will cause your downfall.
Most traders start out confident but ignorant.
They have an idea and they immediately start trad-
ing. The first few trades turn out to be winners. Then,
after several good trades, the beginning trader usu-
ally takes a big loss. Now fear comes into play. The
trader steps to the side and decides to learn more
about the market. But the more he or she learns, the
more information becomes a crutch instead of a tool.
The trader is unable to act, afraid that he or she might
have overlooked crucial information.
Now the trader gets back into the market and a
few trades go favorably. The individual is more
convinced than before that success depends on get-
ting the right information. But after a few more
winning trades, the trader again sustains a big loss.
The trader now enters an unending cycle of fail-
ure and success that will lead him or her to stop
trading altogether. When the trader wins, he or she
believes information is the key. When the trader
loses, he or she believes that some important infor-
mation was missed. Following each loss, the trader
goes on a more intense quest for information that
will stop the losses. But the losses continue, and
the trader ultimately gives up.
With trading, your success or failure begins and
ends in your mind. You have to prioritize the ran-
dom information the market generates. If you
think in an orderly fashion, the market will begin
to make sense. But if your mind is all over the
50 SAMMY CHUA’S DAY TRADE YOUR WAY TO FINANCIAL FREEDOM
place, your focus will always be on the wrong
things. You are your biggest enemy in trading.
BEING RIGHT DOES NOT EQUAL MAKING MONEY.
Beginning traders are more concerned with being
right about a trade than the trade itself. This leads to
a natural tendency to hold on to losers and cut win-
ners short. Most beginners think being right equals
making money. When they have a winning trade,
they take their profit quickly. To the beginners, tak-
ing a profit means that they have proven to the
world that they were right. Beginners also tend to
believe that if they have not closed a losing position,
they have not yet lost. The losses are only on paper.
It is not real. So they hang on until the pain gets too
unbearable, and then they close out the position.
The bottom line is this: Cutting profits and
hanging on to losers is a sure way to failure. Being
right and making money are exact opposites in
trading. Many of the good traders I know have a
winning percentage of only 40 percent. But they
make a lot of money. I also know traders whose
winning percentages are over 90 percent. And yet,
they are consistent losers.
The reason is simple. They focus only on the high
percentage of winners, thinking this equals prof-
itability. They ignore something called the reward-
to-risk ratio. This ratio measures the amount of
profits per trade and the amount of losses per trade.
The reward-to-risk ratio of a beginning trader is
about one to four. This means winning trades net
them an average of $1. But they lose $4 on their los-
ing trades. Let’s take a sample of 100 trades with
14762_Chua_2p_c05.j.qxp 2/2/07 11:34 AM Page 50
ELEMENTS OF SUCCESSFUL TRADING 51
this type of ratio. Of the 100 trades, 80 are winners
and 20 are losers. The total profits would be $80, or
80 winning trades multiplied by a $1 profit per
trade. Total losses are 20 losing trades multiplied by
a $4 loss per trade. This also equals $80! The net
result in this case is zero! The trader with a high
winning percentage has not made a dime.
But a trader with a reward to risk ratio of two to one
and a winning percentage of only 50 percent will make
money. Consider another 100-trade sample, this time
with a reward-to-risk ratio of two to one. A 50 per-
cent winning percentage translates to 50 winners
and 50 losers. Of the 50 winners, the trader makes $2
on each trade, or a total of $100. Of the 50 losers, this
trader loses $1 on each trade, or a total of $50. The
net result in this case is a profit of $50. Even though
this trader makes money only half the time, he is
profitable. This exercise tells us one thing: Being
right does not equal making money in trading.
Avoid System OptimizationThe compulsive need to be right has resulted in
a strategy known as system optimization. This
involves using computers to analyze technical
indicators and historical data. The data is “opti-
mized” for current market connotations. Some
traders believe this data makes the market pre-
dictable. They also believe they will make a lot of
money using this system.
But system optimization does not work in real
life. It does not work because the market is con-
stantly changing. The market is made up of people.
People are not predictable. Even my longtime
friends often act in ways that surprise me. The con-
cept of trying to predict mass behavior is absurd. If
the market ever becomes completely predictable,
we would be able to optimize a computer program
that would make us rich. But in real life, conditions
change day by day, week by week, month by month.
What works well today may be useless tomorrow.
A quick look at two intraday Nasdaq charts
proves this point. Figure 5.1 shows the market is
clearly on a downtrend. On a day like this, a trend-
following system developed through system opti-
mization will make money for you. On the other
hand, an oscillation-type system will constantly be
stopped out. In Figure 5.2, the reverse is true. The
trend-following system is less likely to make
money than an oscillation-type system. This is
because the market had very little trend and
moved sideways the whole day.
Looking at Figure 5.1, traders who use system
optimization would conclude that the trend-
following method works. So they would customize
the system’s indicators to fit this type of market.
But, as seen in Figure 5.2, the conditions that
favored a trend-following system reversed the
very next day. This forces the traders to rethink
their strategies. Based on the information gained
the second day, an oscillating system seems to
work better, so the traders reconfigure their sys-
tem again. It is a vicious cycle. When you op-
timize a trading system, you will almost always
be late.
Many of the optimized trading systems used
10 or 20 years ago have become obsolete. They
worked for the markets that existed years ago, but
not for today’s market. However, methods using
14762_Chua_2p_c05.j.qxp 2/2/07 11:34 AM Page 51
fundamental and technical analysis have withstood
the test of time. They have been in use for ages and
ages. They worked before and they work today.
They will continue to work in the future. The only
difference is that these systems and methods were
never optimized to the current market conditions.
Another way of understanding why optimiza-
tion does not work is human psychology. Using
the most general terms, you can find similarities
between everyone. Based on these similarities, a
psychologist can predict the most likely outcome
of an event. Even so, it is still not a sure thing, just
a most likely outcome. Personalities vary from
individual to individual. What is true for one per-
son might not be true for another.
52 SAMMY CHUA’S DAY TRADE YOUR WAY TO FINANCIAL FREEDOM
The same logic applies to trading systems. We
cannot design a system that perfectly fits a chang-
ing market. There is no sure thing in trading.
Anyone who claims to have a system that works
100 percent of the time is lying. We can only work
with general probabilities. The best systems work
on a lower probability of success but a high reward-
to-risk ratio. As a trader, you need to balance the
two to find the right trading system for yourself.
Accept Losses and Move OnViewing losses the right way is a large part of the
trading profession. Your ability to accept losses
quickly and easily will have a great impact on your
success. The most successful traders I know feel no
5.1 Nasdaq Futures on a Downtrend
� This intraday chart clearly shows the market on a downtrend. A trend-following system works well in this type of market.
14762_Chua_2p_c05.j.qxp 2/2/07 11:34 AM Page 52
ELEMENTS OF SUCCESSFUL TRADING 53
remorse when they take a loss. They know it is part
of the business. They quickly exit positions that
have not gone their way, keeping losses small and
inconsequential. These traders have setbacks, but
they never go broke because of them.
Maintain DisciplineDiscipline is another characteristic of a successful
trader. As a trader, your objective is to find the best
trading opportunities. You should trade only if
there is a high probability of success and a favor-
able reward-to-risk ratio.
There is a popular saying in trading: “Plan
your trades and trade your plan.” The idea is sim-
ple, but it is not an easy task to complete. Many
traders have great trading plans, but they are
unable to control themselves. They get into posi-
tions even though an entry signal has not been
generated. Or they get out of positions early, even
though their trading system dictates otherwise.
Some traders take massive risks outside their
trading plans. They are impatient and impulsive.
They do not belong in the profession of trading.
Sooner or later, the market will take them out of
this business.
Disciplined trading can lead to consistent prof-
itability. It is the only way to build trust in your
systems and prevent destructive tendencies from
taking over. Staying on course when the going gets
tough takes a lot of discipline. Exiting at the right
5.2 Nasdaq Futures on a Sideways Move
� This intraday chart clearly shows the market on a sideways move. A systemthat uses an oscillation-type indicator works well in this type of market.
14762_Chua_2p_c05.j.qxp 2/2/07 11:34 AM Page 53
time also takes discipline. So does waiting for the
right opportunity to come along. Make sure you
practice disciplined trading from the beginning.
Do not start this profession by developing bad
habits.
Be PatientAnother characteristic of a successful trader is
patience. Trading is about waiting until conditions
are right to trade. I frequently stay on the sidelines
all day without making a trade. My students have
asked why I stay out. My answer is always the
same. A good opportunity did not present itself.
The conditions that I sought never arose, so I did
nothing.
Sitting on the sidelines is a strategy. At a job, we
are expected to be busy all the time. To make
money in trading, you need to be busy at the right
time. When conditions are not right, your job is to
do nothing. Just sit and wait. Be patient. Opportu-
nities always arise.
PerseverePerseverance is also required to trade the right
way. During the course of your trading career,
there will be periods in which nothing you do
seems right. This will have a severe impact on
your psyche and on the way you approach trad-
ing. It will introduce fear into your trading, mak-
ing you hesitate when you should not, and making
you wait longer than you should before exiting a
losing position.
It takes perseverance to get through the bad
times. You need the strength to pick up the pieces
54 SAMMY CHUA’S DAY TRADE YOUR WAY TO FINANCIAL FREEDOM
every day and continue trading. The battle to con-
trol your emotions while trading is never an easy
one. It is not something you can change overnight.
It takes work to detach yourself from the money
aspect of trading and not get emotional about
losses. It takes practice and more practice. Perse-
vere through all the challenges, and success is but
a small step away.
Be Self-ReliantThe successful trader is self-reliant. Traders do not
become successful by following the lead of some-
one else. Ultimately, we are responsible for our
own actions. Blaming others for our losses lessens
the possibility of learning from our mistakes. If you
take responsibility for your trades, you will begin
acquiring the knowledge you need to improve.
Taking responsibility means relying on your own
judgment, getting in and out of positions based on
your own perceptions and knowledge.
Traders who search for a guru to follow will
learn nothing about themselves. These traders are
never responsible for their own losses. It is
always the guru who is at fault. You can’t dis-
cover your weaknesses by following someone
else. The vital piece that is missing here is confi-
dence. Unless we take responsibility and rely on
our own judgments, we will not gain the confi-
dence needed to bridge the gap between success
and failure. Confidence is especially needed dur-
ing times of uncertainty. It keeps you going when
things are not working out.
We know there will be good times and bad
times. Your trading system will be geared toward
14762_Chua_2p_c05.j.qxp 2/2/07 11:34 AM Page 54
ELEMENTS OF SUCCESSFUL TRADING 55
making a profit, with losses factored in. You will
take losses, but you will also take profits. Some
traders are eager to take losses because they
“know” a profitable trade is just around the corner.
That’s how confident they have become. That’s
how much trust they have in their systems.
RISK MANAGEMENT
The second key element of successful trading is
risk management.
Do the Hard WorkTrading is hard work. Before you make a trade,
you must do research. You need to analyze charts.
You need to read news. You also need to plan your
trading day and pick the stocks for a watch list.
What are their entry points? What are their stop-
loss points? What are their profit-taking points?
What size position should you take?
These questions need to be answered before
you start trading. And after the trading day, you
need to analyze your trades. Go back and check
the charts; figure out what you did right and what
you did wrong. Then the process starts again.
Stay in the GameRisk management includes both money manage-
ment and risk control. It is the part of your trading
system that tells you how much you can risk on
one trade, and it is vitally important.
Trading means taking risks. If you do not con-
trol risk, you will not be around long enough to
become successful. Traders who succeed for a time
without risk management eventually go out of
business. Proper money management means that
one bad trade, or even a series of bad trades, can-
not put you out of the game.
Without risk management, the best trading sys-
tem in the world, one that is right 90 percent of the
time, will not save you. But with good risk manage-
ment skills, you could have an inaccurate system
and still get respectable returns. Studies have shown
that 90 percent of the variance in fund manager per-
formance can be attributed to risk management.
Jesse Livermore was a noted trader whose
biggest failure was lack of risk management. He is
considered one of the greatest speculators ever. He
went from being poor to being rich, from rich to
poor, and back again several times. He would risk
everything he had on trading. His winning streaks
would make millions for him; his losing streaks
would completely bust him. In the end, flat broke,
he committed suicide. The note he left said that he
considered his life to be a total failure. My inten-
tion in relaying his story is to stress the importance
of protecting your capital. No matter how lucky
you are or how good you are, sooner or later the
law of averages will catch up to you. There are no
sure things in trading.
Here is the only way to prevent a catastrophic
loss when you trade: Make sure that the amount of
money you risk on each trade is so small that you
can sustain numerous losses without having to
quit and get a job. The casino business is a good
example of good risk management. Casinos are in
the gambling business. However, the casino busi-
ness itself is no gamble. Casinos take few risks
14762_Chua_2p_c05.j.qxp 2/2/07 11:34 AM Page 55
with the money you pour into their coffers. They
watch their money like hawks. Casinos have a
house edge. All their games are skewed in favor of
the casino. The casino keeps 2 cents for every dol-
lar you put into a slot machine. Casinos let the law
of averages work for them. This means that if you
play long enough, the casino will end up with the
other 98 cents of your dollar.
Casinos keep their risks small. They never take
on a gambler who has the ability to break the bank.
That is why they have house limits. This keeps
their risk spread out and their losses small. Trad-
ing should be the same as the casino business. As
traders, we can gain a house edge and we can let
the law of averages work in our favor. We do this
with risk management, by keeping our risk small.
In June of 2000, I ran into a bad streak. Every
morning I prepared a list of stocks to trade. I
selected one stock to trade when the market
opened. I picked the loser every day, while the
other stocks on my list worked out fine. Were it not
for risk management, I would not be here today,
writing this book and still trading. After suffering
many consecutive losses, my account was still
robust enough for me to come back the next
month. In July, everything I touched made money.
There is no telling when a bad streak will come.
But if you practice risk management, you will sur-
vive. You will live to play another day.
TRADING METHODOLOGY
The third key element of successful trading is
methodology.
56 SAMMY CHUA’S DAY TRADE YOUR WAY TO FINANCIAL FREEDOM
Avoid Psychological BarriersA large loss is a body blow to your psyche. When
you discipline yourself not to take huge posi-
tions, you avoid this psychological damage.
Small losses do not create psychological barriers
that keep you in a losing frame of mind. Why
would a trader ever take a large position? Most
traders play big when they think they have a sure
winner. But taking this type of position results in
a loss of objectivity. You will become emotional
about the trade. This means you will hang on if
the position goes bad and claim a profit too
quickly. This is the very opposite of what needs to
be done. As we all know, there is no sure thing in
trading. Sooner or later, traders who habitually
risk the whole wad on one trade will end up los-
ing everything. Think of the sad story of Jesse
Livermore.
Traders also take obscenely large positions
because they have a gambler’s mentality. These
traders think trading is a get-rich-quick scheme,
that free money is there for the taking. In the end,
they are the ones who get taken. There is no place
for gambling in this profession. We should take
only calculated risks. In fact, unless the variables
are completely in our favor, there is no sense trad-
ing at all. Gamblers might win some of the time,
but never all the time. I don’t care to gamble with
my business.
When we keep it small, we stay objective. We do
not hesitate to exit a position and move on to the
next trade. But when we risk large amounts, we
have a tendency to want to make things work. This
tendency is the trader’s biggest enemy. When I
14762_Chua_2p_c05.j.qxp 2/2/07 11:34 AM Page 56
ELEMENTS OF SUCCESSFUL TRADING 57
hear traders say, “I cannot afford to lose this
money,” I know they have risked too much. For
these people, trading is very stressful. They have
lost their objectivity. They cannot sense the market
flow anymore. They are fighting themselves, not
the market.
This battle within your mind can be easily ap-
peased. All you need to do is make sure you risk
the same controlled amounts every time you trade.
Never break this rule, and the ups and downs of
trading will never break you. As a beginner, make
sure you take risk management seriously, very
seriously. If you fail to do this, you will deplete
your capital before you gain the experience neces-
sary to be a successful trader.
Even as a seasoned trader, my primary concern
is to be here tomorrow! If I can guarantee tomor-
row, I know I am going to make money. I don’t
worry about making millions of dollars a year. I
make small, well-calculated trades, slowly build-
ing my account. I am trying to win by hitting sin-
gles and doubles and stealing a few bases.
I am not a home run hitter; they strike out too
much. If I make just 3 percent a day, my account
will compound to a whopping 80 percent return in
a month! Time becomes my best friend.
Follow the 2 Percent RuleHere are some good ways to manage risk. I live by
what I call the “2 percent rule.” I never risk more
than 2 percent of my capital on any trade. If my ini-
tial capital is $50,000, I will not risk more than 2
percent, or $1,000. My maximum risk per trade is
no more than $1,000. This amount includes com-
missions and slippage. There are two ways to use
the 2 percent rule.
First, use it to determine whether to make a
trade or not. Many traders feel comfortable trad-
ing a particular share size. Let’s assume, for exam-
ple, that you typically buy 300 shares per trade.
You pick a stock that you believe will go up. After
checking the chart, you believe the entry point is
$35 and the stop-loss point is $32. If the trade goes
against you and is stopped out, the loss per share
would be $3. This is calculated by subtracting the
stop-loss price from the entry price. Because you
bought 300 shares, the total risk exposure is $3 per
share multiplied by 300 shares, or $900.
If your account size was $50,000 and your maxi-
mum risk was 2 percent, this trade would still be
acceptable because it is below your limit of $1,000,
dictated by the 2 percent rule. You should not make
the trade with a lower loss point. For example, if the
loss point was $31 instead of $32, the loss would be
$4 per share. This is because $4 per share multiplied
by 300 shares equals $1,200. And $1,200 is greater
than the maximum allowed risk per trade.
This method forces the trader to look for oppor-
tunities with the least amount of loss per share.
Second, use the maximum risk per trade figure
to calculate the number of shares you should
trade. Suppose you have $50,000 and you adhere
to the 2 percent risk rule. We know the maximum
loss per trade should not exceed $1,000. You’re
considering a trade with an entry point of $50 and
a stop-loss point of $45. The possible loss per share
would be at $5. Because the maximum loss per
trade is $1,000 and the possible loss per share is at
14762_Chua_2p_c05.j.qxp 2/2/07 11:34 AM Page 57
$5, how many shares should you trade on this
position?
The answer is simple. Divide the maximum loss
per trade by the possible loss per share and you
will get the maximum share size that can be
traded. In this case, you would divide $1,000 by $5,
and get an answer of 200 shares. This method
gives you flexibility. By raising and lowering the
number of shares, you can trade all opportunities
58 SAMMY CHUA’S DAY TRADE YOUR WAY TO FINANCIAL FREEDOM
that present themselves and still maintain the
same amount of risk per trade.
In both methods of risk management, knowing
the stop-loss point is critical. Without it, you should
never take on a trade. This is the first step in control-
ling your losses and managing your risk. Never
enter a trade without knowing your stop-loss point.
Without a stop-loss point, it is impossible to apply the
risk management principles we have just described. ●$
14762_Chua_2p_c05.j.qxp 2/2/07 11:34 AM Page 58
CHAPTER 6
TradingStrategies
• Scalping
• Intraday-Trend Trading
• Swing Trading
• Long-Term Trading
• Back Testing
14762_Chua_2p_c06.j.qxp 2/2/07 11:34 AM Page 59
There are several trading styles. They include
scalping, intraday position trading, swing trading
and even long-term trading. These styles are cov-
ered in detail in this chapter. But keep this in mind:
You should concentrate on the style that fits your
personality. Some traders love high-speed action.
Scalping would probably be right for them. Many
traders prefer longer-term trades because they do
not want to be glued to the monitor for 61⁄2 hours
every trading day. A more laid-back style would be
right for them.
SCALPING
Scalping is one of the toughest types of trading. It
means trying to capture profits of less than $0.50
per share as fast and as often as you can.
There are several ways to scalp. This first is by
capturing the spread. The scalper tries to buy at
the bid and sell at the ask. These days, spreads on
stocks with large trading volumes have become
smaller. Before the market converted to decimal
pricing, the standard spread was 1⁄16 of a dollar or a
“teenie.” A “teenie” equals 6.25 cents. A scalper
who bought at the bid and sold immediately at the
ask would make the spread of 6.25 cents per share.
60 SAMMY CHUA’S DAY TRADE YOUR WAY TO FINANCIAL FREEDOM
If the commission was a penny per share, the
scalper would still make money. The scalper must
be right more often than not. Three things can hap-
pen: The stock can go against you, stay the same,
or move in your favor. Two of the three possibili-
ties are bad.
When the market went to decimal pricing, the
spread on the high-volume stocks became a penny
or less. This has made it impossible for scalpers
to profit. Another scalping technique involves
momentum trading. Scalpers try to ride on the
back of institutional trading. They learn to spot
opportunities on Level II, then jump in at the
beginning of a move and get out before the
momentum dies. On any given day, there will be
short bursts of activity when buy or sell orders
from large institutions reach the market. The sheer
size of these orders tends to move the market in
the direction of the order. A sell order tends to
move the market down, whereas a buy order
moves the market up. It takes effort to learn to spot
these activities.
Rather than looking for specific stocks, momen-
tum scalpers watch for news events, earnings
reports, and business news that can set a particular
stock in motion. They watch the various queues
TRADING STRATEGIES INVOLVE A PREDEFINED SET of guide-
lines for entering and exiting a trade. These guidelines can be based
on technical or fundamental analysis. They determine what stocks
you should trade and when you should trade them.
14762_Chua_2p_c06.j.qxp 2/2/07 11:34 AM Page 60
TRADING STRATEGIES 61
for signs of a potential burst of activity. Usually,
this is done by watching the activities of the mar-
ket makers.
Another method the scalper uses is “shadow-
ing the ax.” The “ax” is a large institutional player
that is actively participating in the movement of a
stock. Usually, the institution has received a large
buy or sell order. To get it delivered, the institu-
tion will employ different tactics to confuse the
trading public about its true intentions. To make
money using this strategy, scalpers need to have a
clear understanding of how each of the different
market-making operations act. Otherwise, they
can get on the wrong side of the trade. I do not dis-
cuss all the various scalping tactics here, but now
you have the basic idea. A scalper has to con-
stantly watch the Level II screen and quickly react
to the information it provides. Unfortunately, the
screen does not slow down and allow the scalper
to interpret the information. Decisions must be
made in less than a second. Once a decision has
been made, scalpers must react before the price
moves away from them. Execution skills come
into play. Scalpers with less than optimum execu-
tion skills will not succeed. They will always be
late, unable to get the shares they want. Scalping
is not for everyone.
INTRADAY-TREND TRADING
Intraday-trend traders trade a slightly longer
period of time than the scalper. Their profit objec-
tives are a minimum of $1, so execution skills are
not critical, but they are nonetheless important.
Every penny saved is truly a penny earned. As the
name implies, the trader follows intraday trends.
If the market stays in a tight range and fails to
form a trend, the trader will sustain a loss. The key
is to make good money on the days when the mar-
ket moves in a strong trend. This type of trading is
not as hectic as scalping. It can be profitable when
the market moves dramatically. This is the style I
like to trade. The losses are usually small and the
gains can be substantial if the techniques are cor-
rect. I use a combination of methods when I follow
a trend. I do not scalp, but I use scalping tech-
niques for entry and exit points. Level II is a great
way to identify entry and exit points. I like to
enter long positions when a stock is pulling back a
bit and reaching a support level. I like to enter my
short trades on bounces that hit a resistance level.
Reading Level II can give you these levels before
they actually form. I use technical analysis to find
intraday-trend trading candidates. Rotating posi-
tions every day involves a lot of research, but the
payoff can be good. Fundamental analysis does
not matter to me at all. Day trading is short term
and can be based purely on technical analysis.
Watch out for overtrading. It is better to deal with
only a few well-chosen candidates. Trade them
during the day and then continue to perfect your
technique.
SWING TRADING
The swing trader holds a position for one to five
days. The biggest mistake swing traders make is
holding a losing position too long. This is the
14762_Chua_2p_c06.j.qxp 2/2/07 11:34 AM Page 61
biggest difference between a successful swing
trader and a struggling one. The only reason to
hold a losing position is because it never hits the
stop-loss point. Otherwise, time should never be a
factor for exiting trades. Price action alone should
determine when you exit.
Technical analysis plays a key role in this style
of trading. It can be used to improve the chances of
a successful trade. I focus on the longer trend if I
plan to carry positions overnight. This often puts
me on the right side of the trade.
Some swing traders have found success by
combining technical analysis with fundamental
analysis. I believe that technical analysis should
be at least 70 percent of the equation. If there are
inefficiencies in the market, the one- to five-day
holding time may be sufficient to correct the
inefficiency.
LONG-TERM TRADING
The long-term trader has the longest time frame of
all. Trades can range from one month to six
months. Technical analysis plays a big role, but
fundamental analysis can also help. A few things
add risk to this style of trading. Usually, traders
hold positions through a company’s earnings
announcement. This works if earnings come in
better than expected. But what if the news is bad?
Whenever a company misses estimates, long-term
traders stand to lose money. If you hold positions
for the long term, the likelihood of getting stung
by bad news increases. Unlike with scalping, intra-
day trading, and swing trading, execution skills
62 SAMMY CHUA’S DAY TRADE YOUR WAY TO FINANCIAL FREEDOM
and commissions are minor factors with long-term
trading.
After settling on a style of trading, pick the type
of analysis you want to use. It could be purely tech-
nical, a mix of technical and fundamental analysis,
or 100 percent fundamental analysis. That choice is
yours. The longer the trading time frame, the better
fundamental analysis will work. The best system is
still a mix of fundamental and technical analysis.
Setting conditions and specific trade guidelines
forces traders to narrow their trading choices.
Narrowing choices does not automatically mean
success.
BACK TESTING
There is a way to test your trading style before
making live trades. It involves using historical data
to determine the profitability of the style. It is called
back testing. Some trading platforms, like Trade-
Station and CyberTrader, come with this feature
built in. Or you can buy software programs that
access historical data and test certain combinations
of technical and fundamental data. The cost is
cheap relative to the risk you would take if you
were to test an idea by actually trading a position.
Scalping cannot be back tested. Usually, histori-
cal data does not cover the intricacies of Level II.
With this method, the key is experience. Many
scalpers start by trading only 100 shares. Their
intention is to learn how to react quickly to
momentum changes. Profit is not the main objec-
tive. Once they can consistently capitalize on
momentum runs, they will increase the share size.
14762_Chua_2p_c06.j.qxp 2/2/07 11:34 AM Page 62
TRADING STRATEGIES 63
Most scalpers will lose money during this learning
process. Some do not survive the steep learning
curve and lose their money. Those who survive
often make a nice living.
After back testing the trading system, you need
to adjust and improve it. I like trading systems that
produce successful signals of at least 60 percent
with a reward-to-risk ratio of at least 2 to 1. Other-
wise, I would continue on the search. Figure 6.1
shows the results of a simple back test of an
MACD crossover strategy. Back testing is an
important part of developing a sound system, but
remember, markets exist because the future is unpre-
dictable. ●$
6.1 Testing Strategies
� BACK TESTING IS AN IMPORTANT PART of developing a sound system. This is a simple back test of the MACD crossoverusing CyberTraders Strategy Tester.
14762_Chua_2p_c06.j.qxp 2/2/07 11:34 AM Page 63
14762_Chua_2p_c06.j.qxp 2/2/07 11:34 AM Page 64
CHAPTER 7
TechnicalAnalysis
• Charts
• Identifying Support and Resistance
• Trading Strategies
• Trendlines
• Gaps
• Basic Chart Patterns
• Volume Analysis
14762_Chua_2p_c07.j.qxp 2/2/07 11:35 AM Page 65
Price movement provides an understanding of
the underlying forces at work on a stock. The price
of a security represents a consensus between buyer
and a seller. It also shows when supply and
demand is at equilibrium. When price is plotted on
a chart, a trader can get an understanding of where
the overall sentiment lies. When the trading public
is selling a particular security, the equilibrium
price tends to head downward. When traders are
accumulating and holding a security, the equilib-
rium price tends to head upward. The rise and fall
of prices gives the trader an idea of ongoing senti-
ment shifts. Waves of buying push prices up and
waves of selling push prices down. A technical
analyst wants to know which wave is the
strongest. If buying pressure is strong, the chance
of a rise in price is high. This is simply the law of
supply and demand. When buyers snap up a
stock, its supply declines. When supply is limited,
prices tend to go up. On the other hand, if the sell-
ers are in control, there is a lot more supply. When
supply is strong, prices tend to go down.
A quick look at gas prices demonstrates how this
works. People travel more in the summer than in
the winter. This produces an added demand for
gasoline. Because gasoline manufacturers do not
66 SAMMY CHUA’S DAY TRADE YOUR WAY TO FINANCIAL FREEDOM
produce more gasoline during the summer
months, the gasoline supply remains constant. If
demand grows while the supply is constant, prices
will rise. During winter months, people travel a lot
less. The demand for gasoline also drops. When
this happens, there will be a corresponding drop in
the price of gasoline. Another example is the
“Tickle Me Elmo” toy. When it was in demand,
mothers were willing to pay exorbitant prices to get
them. After Christmas was over, prices dropped as
demand subsided. Now the once-hard-to-find toy
goes on sale several times a year; the demand is
gone. All commodities are subject to the law of sup-
ply and demand, be it a car, a head of lettuce, a
house or a stock. Even your time is a commodity.
Charles Dow developed the following three
concepts:
●1 Price discounts everything. The current price reflects all
available information.
●2 Price movements are not random. They reflect a shift in
market sentiment. Sentiment can shift from positive to
negative. When sentiment is mixed, prices tend to move
sideways.
●3 Trends are formed when sentiment shifts. Trends are
predictable. A technical analyst should be more
TECHNICAL ANALYSIS IS THE STUDY of past price movement to
determine possible future price direction. The primary tool for tech-
nical analysis is the price chart. Charles Dow originated this method
of analysis around 1900.
14762_Chua_2p_c07.j.qxp 2/2/07 11:35 AM Page 66
TECHNICAL ANALYSIS 67
concerned with the current price than with the history
behind the price. This follows the idea that price dis-
counts everything. If all information is already reflected in
the current price, it is unnecessary to understand why a
certain price has been reached.
CHARTS
A price chart is a series of prices plotted over
a period of time. The period can be as long as a
month or as short as a second. A chartist using a
long period, such as a month, is plotting long-
term trends. A chartist using a brief period, such
as a tick-by-tick chart, is plotting short-term
opportunities.
Types of ChartsThere are several types of charts to choose from.
The most popular are bar charts, candlesticks, line
charts and point and figure charts.
Bar Charts
The bar chart is the most popular charting
method. There are two variations. Figure 7.1, for
example, shows only the high, low, and closing
prices. Each bar represents a time period. In this
case, one trading day. Each bar also shows three
pieces of information. The top of the vertical bar is
the highest price of the day. The bottom of the bar
represents the lowest price of the day. The little
horizontal line that sticks out to the right of the
7.1 S&P Bar Chart
� THIS IS A BAR CHART OF S&P 500 INDEX. Each bar will give you informationon the high, low, and closing price of each day.
14762_Chua_2p_c07.j.qxp 2/2/07 11:35 AM Page 67
vertical bar represents the closing price. In this
case, it closed about in the middle of the day’s
range (see Figure 7.2).
The next variation adds another piece of infor-
mation to the bar, the opening price, as shown in
Figure 7.3. The bars on the chart show the open,
high, low, and closing prices. Notice that there is a
slight difference in the way the bars are drawn.
Here’s how to interpret the information on this
type of bar chart: The top and bottom of the verti-
cal bar represent the high and low price of the day.
The horizontal bar to the right is also the closing
price. The only difference is the horizontal bar to
the left, which marks the opening price (see Fig-
ure 7.3).
Many technicians discount the importance of
the opening price. Usually, the opening price is
determined by amateur orders placed the night
before, which are considered of little significance.
68 SAMMY CHUA’S DAY TRADE YOUR WAY TO FINANCIAL FREEDOM
They pay attention to the closing price because it
was determined by professionals.
Candlesticks
This method of charting originated in Japan more
than 300 years ago. Its use has recently gained
popularity. Candlesticks plot the open, high, low,
and close. They show how these prices relate to
each other in a manner that can be understood at a
glance (see Figure 7.4).
In a white or open candlestick, the opening
price is lower than the closing price. This means
the professionals were able to move the price up
after the market opened. In a black or closed can-
dlestick, the opening price is higher than the clos-
ing price. This means that during the period
covered by the candlestick, the price closed below
the open. Sellers were able to drive the prices
down.
7.2 Bar Chart
� THIS BAR CHART SHOWS only the high, low, andclosing price.
7.3 Bar Chart
� THIS BAR CHART SHOWS high, low, and closing priceplus the open price.
14762_Chua_2p_c07.j.qxp 2/2/07 11:35 AM Page 68
TECHNICAL ANALYSIS 69
In some cases, you will find that the pattern
has no body. All you see is a straight line across.
These are doji patterns. Doji patterns mean the
opening and closing prices were the same (see
Figure 7.5).
The wicks of the candlestick mark the high and
low of the day. Sometimes, you will not find wicks
on the top or the bottom. Figure 7.6 shows samples
of these patterns and their interpretations.
Line Charts
The simplest chart is the line chart. It’s formed by
plotting the closing prices. All you need to do is
draw a line that connects the closing prices from
period to period. Some traders also plot the open,
high, and low prices on line charts. It is important
to be consistent. Do not plot the closing price one
day and the opening price the next day. If you are
plotting multiple numbers, you need to plot a line
for each. Use one for open price, another for clos-
ing price, and so on.
Line charts are most commonly used when the
open, high, and low prices are not available. Some
securities provide only the closing prices, so plot-
ting them any other way is impossible. Figure 7.7
shows an example of a simple line chart. The line
tracks only the closing price of the index as it
moves up and down.
7.4 The Candlestick Chart
� THIS IS A CANDLESTICK CHART OF THE S&P 500 INDEX, which has all theinformation a bar chart offers. It also shows at a glance how these pricesrelate to each other.
14762_Chua_2p_c07.j.qxp 2/2/07 11:35 AM Page 69
Point and Figure Charts
Point and figure charts are different from all other
charts. Instead of plotting one point, one bar, or
one candlestick for each period of time, this
method is based solely on price movements. It
70 SAMMY CHUA’S DAY TRADE YOUR WAY TO FINANCIAL FREEDOM
does not take time into consideration. This makes
it easy to identify support and resistance levels. It
also allows you to effortlessly see breakouts or
breakdowns of these levels. Thus it allows you to
quickly recognize the underlying trend.
7.5 & 7.6 Candlestick Patterns
� DEPICTED HERE ARE OPEN, CLOSED, AND DOJI CANDLESTICKS. Note that a doji candlestick indicates that the open and close price were the same. Thecandlestick wicks show how candlesticks mark the high and low stock price of the day.
14762_Chua_2p_c07.j.qxp 2/2/07 11:35 AM Page 70
TECHNICAL ANALYSIS 71
This method of charting is very simple. Prices
that fail to move significantly are not considered
relevant, and therefore are not plotted. It is only
when the price movement exceeds a certain level
that it is recorded. If the price of a security is rising,
it is plotted as an X. While it continues to increase,
more Xs are marked onto the same column. When
the price movement is downward, you plot it as an
O. Before you start plotting anything onto a new
column, the price movement has to go over a pre-
determined “reversal amount” in the opposite
direction. The reversal amount is your wiggle
room. It takes out all the noise and smoothes out
the trend. What you end up with is a series of X
and O columns, like the one shown in Figure 7.8.
Not all charting software offers point and figure
charting.
Types of Price ScalingThere are two ways to display the price scale along
the y-axis: arithmetic or logarithmic.
An arithmetic scale simply means that each price
along the y-axis is a fixed distance from the next
price on the scale. It is also called linear scaling. For
example, each level could represent a $5 increase
in price. You would see a level at $5, another at $10,
and another at $15.
A logarithmic scale displays price movement in
terms of percentages. Between $5 and $10 is a 100
percent increase. The next 100 percent level from
7.7 Line Chart
� THIS IS A SIMPLE LINE CHART OF THE S&P 500. Note that the line tracks onlythe closing price of the index as it moved up and down.
14762_Chua_2p_c07.j.qxp 2/2/07 11:35 AM Page 71
$10 would be at $20. In logarithmic scaling, the
levels would read $5, $10, and $20. By scaling the
chart as percentage of price movement, it is easier
to compare different securities. A $5 move on a $20
stock would now look the same as a $10 move on a
$40 stock, because both have a 25 percent price
move.
Basic Charting TechniquesBasic charting is a time-tested technique. It has
been around for a long time. When it comes to
intraday trading, I find that basic techniques are
even more important than the more complicated
72 SAMMY CHUA’S DAY TRADE YOUR WAY TO FINANCIAL FREEDOM
stuff out there. They are a lot more reliable and
tend to produce the most profit if used properly.
Many of the complicated indicators do not work
well intraday.
The most notable ones are those that include
volume in their analysis. These tend to produce
poor results when used intraday, mainly because
of the lunch period. During the lunch period, vol-
ume usually drops as traders take off to grab
lunch. This practice leads to false signals. Under-
standing how each of the indicators work before
putting them into use will reduce the problem of
false signals.
7.8 Point and Figure Chart
� THIS POINT AND FIGURE CHART OF THE S&P 500 is based solely on pricemovement. A rising price is plotted as an X, a falling price is plotted as an O.This makes it easy to spot support and resistance levels.
14762_Chua_2p_c07.j.qxp 2/2/07 11:35 AM Page 72
TECHNICAL ANALYSIS 73
There are several basic techniques that traders
must know before they venture into the world of
trading. They are as follows:
Identifying support and resistance
Identifying a trend and a trading range
Understanding different types of gaps
Recognizing basic chart patterns
Understanding volume
Beyond basic techniques, I believe the following
indicators are of importance to the trader. They are
discussed in later chapters.
Candlestick patterns and combinations
Moving averages
Moving average convergence divergence (MACD)
Relative strength index
On-balance volume (OBV)
Accumulation/distribution
Time segmented volume (TSV)
IDENTIFYING SUPPORT AND RESISTANCE
Identifying support and resistance levels on a
chart is the first thing you should learn. When a
stock price hits a support level, buying pressure is
stronger than selling pressure. Support levels
interrupt a price decline. Prices usually bounce
up from there. When a stock hits a resistance level,
selling pressure is strong enough to interrupt a
price advance. Prices tend to hit these levels on
the way up.
In his book, Trading for a Living, Dr. Alexander
Elder contends that support and resistance exist
because people have memories. They have memo-
ries of pain and regret. When you buy a stock and
make money, you will remember the price you
paid for the stock. When the stock drops to that
price, you buy it again, hoping to profit from a
rebound. And there are memories of regret. People
regret not getting into a stock at a certain price.
They sat on the sidelines as the price soared. Once
the prices drop down again, they buy aggressively
to avoid missing the next run. This is where sup-
port levels come from.
Resistance levels exist because people also
remember where prices turned around and started
to fall. When a stock price goes up to this turn-
around level, investors start thinking of selling.
Traders who are not in a long position might start
thinking about going short. There are also people
who were caught holding onto losing positions on
the last advance. They are waiting for a rally just to
get out without a loss. They contribute to selling
pressures.
I believe support and resistance levels also have
a lot to do with how people perceive value. If a
stock comes down to $30 from a high of $50, many
investors think it is cheap. But if the price goes
from $50 to $80, investors think it is expensive and
will not buy it. I guess part of the problem lies in
our dependency on financial analysts. They are
responsible for this perception of value we have on
a stock. In reality, the price of a stock is totally
dependent on supply and the demand. If there is a
lot of supply and little demand, prices can get a lot
14762_Chua_2p_c07.j.qxp 2/2/07 11:35 AM Page 73
cheaper. If there is a lot of demand and little sup-
ply, prices can go to the moon.
Nothing is cheap in the stock market. Prices fall
for one simple reason: There is more supply than
demand. No one can predict where a stock finds its
equilibrium. A friend once called to tell me about a
company he was familiar with. The stock had
recently declined from a high of $125 to about $12.
My friend thought it was a steal. He told me how
good the management was, how much cash the
company had, and how strong the fundamentals
were. He could not believe the stock was selling at
just $12. When he finished, I asked him a question.
Did he own the stock? His answer was a resound-
ing yes. The last time I checked, the price was
$1.12. My friend’s analysis was right on the money.
But there was no demand for the stock.
The question, then, is: How cheap is cheap? I will
never know the answer, nor will I try to find out.
On the other hand, how expensive is expensive?
During the tech craze, 9 out of every 10 dot-com
companies were losing money and had astronomi-
cal price-earnings (P/E) ratios. The hedge funds
saw no reason not to short these companies, and
for a time their prices went through the roof. Even-
tually, before the bubble burst, many big hedge
funds had to declare bankruptcy.
As traders, we are not here to make sense of all
of this. We need to separate ourselves from the
crowd and respect the information that charts give
us. A break of a key support level is a sign that sell-
ing pressures have overwhelmed buying activi-
ties. Demand has lessened and there is a lot more
supply in the market. If we are long on a position,
74 SAMMY CHUA’S DAY TRADE YOUR WAY TO FINANCIAL FREEDOM
we need to exit the position as soon as this weak-
ness is confirmed. If we are not in any position,
start considering a short position.
A break of a key resistance level is a sign that
buyers have become aggressive. There is an in-
crease of demand, and prices are likely to go
higher. Exit short positions and enter long posi-
tions when the buying strength follows through.
There are two schools of thought on how to
draw these levels. One says it is better to draw the
support and resistance levels across congestion
areas. The other contends that drawing them at the
extreme edges works better. Both have their merits
and faults. I believe their use depends on the pur-
pose these lines serve.
Extremes mark areas where support and resis-
tance have to exist. If prices fail to turn around
before these extreme levels, they usually follow
through in that direction. I have found that placing
my stop-loss points at extremes tends to work bet-
ter than placing them in congestion areas. This is
even more true when it comes to intraday trading.
On the other hand, for the purpose of technical
analysis, marking them over congestion areas
tends to give you a better picture of the mass men-
tality. Extreme points tend to mark levels of panic
among the weakest traders.
In Figure 7.9, notice how I drew the support and
resistance lines. Going from left to right, the first
top marked a resistance point. Then it came down
to a low and reversed. The low marked the support
level. The next run on the S&P 500 futures was
powerful enough to break past the resistance.
Notice how the resistance now became the support.
14762_Chua_2p_c07.j.qxp 2/2/07 11:35 AM Page 74
TECHNICAL ANALYSIS 75
Prices could not go below it significantly, and
instead went up even more. On this next leg up,
another resistance was hit. Prices came back down
and established another support level higher than
our previous one. The resistance is tested three
times before a breakout occurs. Again, notice how
the roles of resistance and support changed.
Strength of Support and ResistanceThree things govern the strength of support and
resistance levels. They are height, width, and
volume.
The height refers to the price range of the sup-
port and resistance area relative to the price of the
security. The taller the height, the stronger you will
find the support and resistance levels. In the exam-
ple in Figure 7.10, if we first assume that the price
of charts A and B are the same, the resistance and
support levels of chart A are going to be stronger
than those of chart B. This is because the distance
between the levels found in A is greater than in B.
The width refers to the amount of time the price
stays within the support and resistance level. The
longer the period, the stronger those levels are
going to be (see Figure 7.10B).
Finally, volume is another indicator of strength
7.9 Support and Resistance
� IDENTIFYING SUPPORT AND RESISTANCE LEVELS, as shown in this chart, is thefirst skill a day trader should learn. The lows mark the support, and the highsmark the resistance.
14762_Chua_2p_c07.j.qxp 2/2/07 11:35 AM Page 75
on the support and resistance levels. The more vol-
ume occurring on those levels, the stronger the
levels of support and resistance will be.
TRADING STRATEGIES
The support and resistance levels explained in the
previous section comprise the best tool for letting
your profits run and cutting your losses short. If
you get into a long position, the first thing you
should do is place a stop-loss order just slightly
below a support level. Any break of this level sig-
nals a turn for the worse and you should get out of
76 SAMMY CHUA’S DAY TRADE YOUR WAY TO FINANCIAL FREEDOM
your position. As the position goes in your favor,
meaning that price keeps heading up, you should
continue to hold the position. The only time you
should move your stop-loss order up is when it
breaks another resistance level. Keep doing this
until your position gets stopped out, meaning
price has declined to your stop-loss level.
Let’s take NTMD as a trade example (see Figure
7.11). The double bottom pattern (discussed later in
this chapter) on the lower left corner suggests a pos-
sible trend reversal. The confirmation comes when
it breaks out of resistance 1. A long position should
be entered at around $18.45. After entering the long
7.10 Strength of Support and Resistance
� THE HEIGHT OF THE SUPPORT AND RESISTANCE would determine the strengthof those levels. The support and resistance levels for chart A would be strongerthan those for chart B because the height is greater on chart A. The width ofthe support and resistance levels would also determine the strength. The widerthe channel, the stronger the support and resistance level.
14762_Chua_2p_c07.j.qxp 2/2/07 11:35 AM Page 76
TECHNICAL ANALYSIS 77
position, the stop-loss point should be at support 1.
You really do not want to see the price go below the
support. Make sure to exit the long position then.
Notice how resistance 1 also became a minor
support level. Prices came down slightly and
moved up even more. It hesitated just a little, but
broke resistance 2 fairly easily. At this point, you
can choose to move the stop-loss order to that
minor support located at resistance 1, or you can
choose to stick with your original stop-loss point at
support 1. My choice would be to move it up and
protect my capital.
7.11 NTMD Trade Example
� THIS CHART SHOWS that if you entered a trade on NTMD after it broke resistance 1, and just use the support levels asyour trailing stop, you would have capitalized very nicely on the run.
14762_Chua_2p_c07.j.qxp 2/2/07 11:35 AM Page 77
After breaking resistance 2, the price continued
upward until it found another resistance at 3. It
came down and found support just a little bit
above the previous resistance level at 2. The price
went up to test the resistance again on the second
try; then it broke it. Keep this in mind and practice
it diligently: The only time you want to move your
stop-loss point is after prices break out of a resist-
ance level. After a significant break of the resist-
ance level, your stop-loss point should be moved
to the support level below it. This is the best way to
let your profits run while controlling your losses.
After the price breaks resistance 3 at $20.40, your
stop should be moved to support 2 at around
$19.55. Once again, it finds another resistance (4) at
$21.10 and pulls back. Again that prior resistance
area turned into a support level and the selling pres-
sure turned back. Prices went up to break resistance
4, so the stop-loss point should be moved up again
to support 3. The same process is repeated again.
Price movement on the market is never a
straight-line event. It is more like a stairway. It
goes up and levels off. It gains more support
while leveling off, and then it surges upward
again. On this trade, we went from a breakout
price of $18.45 per share to a high run of $22.40;
and we are still in the trade. Already our profit is
$3.95, or +21 percent! There is still no telling when
this run will end.
The process we just described, of moving up
our stop-loss point to protect profits and minimize
losses, is called the trailing stop. You are trailing or
following the trend up. It is only when it stops
going up that you get out. Should the price of
78 SAMMY CHUA’S DAY TRADE YOUR WAY TO FINANCIAL FREEDOM
NTMD go below our stop-loss point at any time
during the trade, we would exit the position.
For the short position, the trading strategy
should be reversed. After entering a short position,
the first place to put your stop-loss order would be
the prior resistance. A break of this resistance level
tells us that the security is stronger than we
expected and we should exit the position. In the
case of shorts, you should move your stop-loss
point down to the next resistance level when
another level of support is broken.
Now let’s take VRSN as an example (see Figure
7.12). A break of support 1 triggered an entry on
the short trade at $45. The stop-loss point should
be initially set at resistance point 1. The price
should not rise that far at all. If it is weak, then the
decline should follow through rather quickly.
Another support level later established itself at
support 2. A break of this level calls for a move of
your stop-loss point to resistance 2. Support 3
quickly sets up. When prices drop below this level,
it would be time to move the stop-loss point again.
This time, it should be moved to resistance 3. It
took a little time for the price to find support at
level 4. It took awhile for the price to reverse and
come back down and break the support.
After the break of support 4, there were two
choices for setting the stop-loss point. It could be
either resistance 4 or resistance 5. Both will work. I
usually prefer the lower level, as it protects more
profit. VRSN hit a low of $36.40, for a total possible
profit of $8.60, or 19 percent.
It is impossible to tell how big a run any trade
will give us. Traders who trade with a set profit
14762_Chua_2p_c07.j.qxp 2/2/07 11:35 AM Page 78
TECHNICAL ANALYSIS 79
objective in mind have a tendency to cut their prof-
its short. Let the market tell you where it is headed.
You’d be surprised how much you leave on the
table if you have a target in mind. Learn to base
your trailing stops on support and resistance lev-
els, and your trading will improve.
TRENDLINESTrendlines are an important tool in technical
analysis. They serve to identify and confirm the
existence of trends. A trendline is simply a straight
line that connects two or more price points. To
draw a trendline, connect support points to sup-
7.12 VRSN Short Trade Example
� A BREAK OF SUPPORT 1 triggered an entry for a short trade. Using resistance 1 as the initial stop-loss point and ourtrailing stop method, we were able to capture a very large part of this run.
14762_Chua_2p_c07.j.qxp 2/2/07 11:35 AM Page 79
port points or resistance points to resistance points
(see Figure 7.13).
When the slope of the lines is positive, the
security is said to be on an uptrend. An uptrend is
characterized by a series of higher highs and
higher lows. Each rally breaks the last resistance
and goes higher. Each pullback gains support
before the last support is reached. Hence, you
have the saying “higher highs and higher lows.”
When a security is trending up, the bottom line is
more significant. If the price continues to stay
above this line, the trend is considered intact. It
indicates increasing demand and decreasing sup-
80 SAMMY CHUA’S DAY TRADE YOUR WAY TO FINANCIAL FREEDOM
ply. A break below the bottom line tells us that
demand could be decreasing and supply could be
increasing. It is a signal that a possible trend
change is coming. A test of the most recent sup-
port level is a sign that a price could be going into
a trading range. A break of the most recent sup-
port level would confirm a new trend direction.
However, a breakout of the resistance level tells
us that the uptrend might still be intact. A new
trendline should be drawn to incorporate the last
support (see Figure 7.14).
When the slope is negative, then a security is said
to be on a downtrend. Downtrends are characterized
7.13 Stock on an Uptrend
� CONNECTING THE SUPPORTS AND RESISTANCE POINTS WITH A LINE would giveus the trendline. A stock on an uptrend is characterized by a series of higherhighs and higher lows in price. The slope of the trendlines is also up.
14762_Chua_2p_c07.j.qxp 2/2/07 11:35 AM Page 80
TECHNICAL ANALYSIS 81
by a series of lower highs and lower lows. Each
decline breaks the last support, with prices going
lower than the last low. Each rally is met with sell-
ers at a lower price than the previous high. Hence,
you have the saying “lower lows and lower highs.”
When a security is trending down, the top line is
more significant. While prices continue to stay
below this line, the downtrend is considered intact.
It indicates that demand is still weak and there is
plenty of supply. A break above the top line tells us
that demand is on the rise and supply could be on
the decline. It is also a sign that a possible trend
change is on the horizon. Should the price rise to
test the most recent resistance level without break-
ing above it, a trading range could be forming. If
the price breaks above the most recent resistance
level, then the direction has probably turned
upward. However, another breakdown of a sup-
port level tells us that the downtrend might still be
intact. A new trendline should be drawn to incor-
porate the last resistance (see Figure 7.15).
A security is said to be in a trading range if there
is no trend. The trendline would be flat. Rallies end
at the same resistance levels, and declines stop at
7.14 Stock on a Downtrend
� CONNECTING THE SUPPORT AND RESISTANCE POINTS WITH A TRENDLINE on theNasdaq Composite Index allows us to easily identify the downtrend that it isin. Downtrending stocks are also characterized by a series of lower highs(resistance) and lower lows (support).
14762_Chua_2p_c07.j.qxp 2/2/07 11:35 AM Page 81
the same support levels. Another name for a mar-
ket in a trading range is a sideways market. It is
descriptive of what the market is doing. Within this
period, the market is basically doing nothing
except moving sideways. It is important to learn to
identify trends and trading ranges. Markets spend
the majority of their time in trading ranges instead
of in trends. Trading techniques are very different
during these two periods.
While the market is in a trading range, it is better
to go short at the resistance levels and go long at
the support levels. If the market is in a trend, then
you should go long at the resistance points and go
short at the support points. These two strategies are
82 SAMMY CHUA’S DAY TRADE YOUR WAY TO FINANCIAL FREEDOM
completely opposite of each other. Without first
identifying what period the market is in, there is no
way a trader will know which strategy to use.
Also, the indicators that you would use during
these two periods will be very different. Most
traders would use trend-following indicators,
such as MACD or the moving averages, if the mar-
ket is in a trend. These indicators work best at
those times. While the market is in a trading range,
oscillating indicators work better. They identify
overbought and oversold conditions, which is usu-
ally a good time to go short or long.
As a trader, it is better and easier to trade when
the market is in a trend. When the market is in a
7.15 Stock in a Trading Range
� THE DOW JONES INDUSTRIES 30 INDEX was in a trading range for severalmonths. Notice how the slope of trendlines that connects the support andresistance points are flat.
14762_Chua_2p_c07.j.qxp 2/2/07 11:35 AM Page 82
TECHNICAL ANALYSIS 83
trading range, trading tends to be choppy. I find
that I often get shaken out of a trade when the mar-
ket is indecisive and directionless. It pays to wait
for a clear trend to establish itself before taking on
a position.
1-2-3 Reversal MethodLearning to recognize the beginning of a new
trend is a big key to nice profits when the market
starts trending. In his book, Trader Vic, Victor
Sperandeo describes a method that has helped him
catch major trend reversals. The method is called
the 1-2-3 reversal.
Let’s start with an uptrend reversal (see Figure
7.16). When a security is on an uptrend, start by
drawing a line connecting the lowest low (A) to the
low of the last minor support (B). You do not want
to see any price action below this trendline. A
break of the trendline at point 1 gives the first sig-
nal that a possible trend reversal is in the making.
A successful test at point 2 of that high set at resis-
tance level C gives the second signal of a trend
change. This is a good place to go short on the
security. A break of support level D at point 3 con-
firms that the trend has, in fact, reversed.
For a security on a downtrend (see Figure 7.17),
draw a line connecting the highest high (A) to the
high of the last minor resistance (B) that came
7.16 1-2-3 Reversal Method
� THE 1-2-3 REVERSAL METHOD allows us to quickly identify when a trend hasreversed. This is an example of an uptrend reversal. At point 1, you have toidentify a break of the trendline. At point 2, you have a failed test of theprevious high. The Nasdaq Composite was unable to breakout of the previousresistance at level C. At point 3, the Nasdaq composite confirms a trendreversal when it broke the support level D.
14762_Chua_2p_c07.j.qxp 2/2/07 11:35 AM Page 83
before the lowest low (C). Make sure there isn’t
any price activity above this trendline. The signals
will come as follows. First, a break (1) of the trend-
line signals a possible direction change. The sec-
ond signal is a successful test (2) of the support of
the lowest low (C). This is good place to be long on
the security. The last signal is a break (3) through of
the last resistance level (D). This serves as a con-
firming signal that the trend has turned around.
The trend is your friend. For intraday trading,
there is nothing better than following the trend.
Whether you want to scalp or swing trade, make
sure that you trade on the side of the trend. Many
traders love to trade against the trend. They try to
catch the bottom or the top. They risk a lot and
84 SAMMY CHUA’S DAY TRADE YOUR WAY TO FINANCIAL FREEDOM
make very little. It is not a good way to trade. Here
are some guidelines when trading with trendlines.
Angle or SlopeThe most important feature to watch on a trendline
is the slope. It identifies which side is in control of
the market. If the slope is up, buyers are in control.
Demand is high and supplies are low. The direc-
tion of the trade should be only long. If the slope is
down, sellers are in control. Supplies are high and
demand is low. Take only short positions. You
need to watch the angle of a trendline. A security
with a very steep angle of ascent has a very high
possibility of running out of steam quickly. This is
the same when it comes to the angle of decline. A
7.17 1-2-3 Reversal Method
� THE 1-2-3 METHOD can also identify a downtrend reversal. At point 1, youhave a break of the trendline between points A and B. At point 2, you have asuccessful test of the lows. LUME was unable to go below the resistance levelC. Confirmation of the trend direction change came at point 3 when pricebroke past resistance level D.
14762_Chua_2p_c07.j.qxp 2/2/07 11:35 AM Page 84
TECHNICAL ANALYSIS 85
very steep decline is a signal of panic selling.
Sooner rather than later, the selling will be done
and the rebound will be just as hard. When the
angles of the trendlines begin to accelerate, it is a
good sign that the trend might soon be coming to
an end. Many astute traders would begin to look
for points to exit their positions (see Figure 7.18).
As you look at Figure 7.18, check the difference
between the angle of the incline on trendline A ver-
sus the one on trendline B. Notice how much
steeper the angle is on this newer trendline. Once
the prices break (C) below the trendline B, it
turned back up again to hit the trendline from
below before heading back down.
Notice the similarities between support/resis-
tance levels and trendlines. While prices stay
above the trendline, it acts as a support level. Once
there is a significant break of the trendline, it will
often turn into the resistance level. This gives
traders a good opportunity to exit long positions
and enter short positions.
For traders who like to “short the tops,” here is
a better way to trade. It is a lot better to wait until
there is a trendline break before going short. I
would then wait for the price to rebound back or
just close to the trendline and then enter the short
position. This increases the odds of your success
tremendously. The reversals at these points are
usually a lot more powerful. The reward-to-risk
ratio is also a lot better at those points.
7.18 When the Slope of Trendlines Increase
� INCREASING TRENDLINE SLOPE can mark the possibility of an uptrendreversal. The slope of trendline B was a lot steeper than trendline A. Priceswere unable to sustain themselves and made a 1-2-3 reversal afterward. Oncetrendline B was broken at point C; this line later became the resistance atpoint D. Point D was a good place to initiate a short position on this stock.
14762_Chua_2p_c07.j.qxp 2/2/07 11:35 AM Page 85
This process is the same when a stock or secu-
rity is on a decline. Let’s take a look at the S&P 500
index (see Figure 7.19). Again, pay attention to the
increasing slope between trendline A and trend-
line B. After the steep drop, prices rebounded back
and broke the trendline at point C. The next
decline came in very close to the trendline before
reversing and heading up.
Different Time FramesDifferent time frames can and will produce differ-
ent results. That is why it is necessary to begin
your trading career by deciding what type of trad-
ing you want to do. If it is scalping, you should
pay attention to the trend on a tick chart or a one-
minute chart. With intraday trend trades, the
86 SAMMY CHUA’S DAY TRADE YOUR WAY TO FINANCIAL FREEDOM
three-minute or the five-minute chart may work
best. If you are intermediate term, you should use
the daily chart.
You will find smaller trends within all the dif-
ferent time frames. Some of them may conflict
with the bigger trend, while others might confirm
it. To put it another way, a weekly chart might
show an uptrend, but the trend could be down in
one or two of those five days that make up the
information on that week. You can further break
this down into a trading day. The fact that the day
ended up does not mean the trend for the whole
day was up. You could have several smaller trends
working against each other to form the end result
of the day.
What time frame should you use? If I were
7.19 When the Slope of Trendlines Decrease
� WHEN THE SLOPE OF A TRENDLINE DECREASES, it can mark the possiblecoming of a downtrend reversal. Comparing the slope of trendline A and B, wecan easily see that the slope has decreased significantly. Again, we can seehow nicely the 1-2-3 reversal method identified the trend reversal afterward.Notice how trendline B turned from being a resistance into a support later on.
14762_Chua_2p_c07.j.qxp 2/2/07 11:35 AM Page 86
TECHNICAL ANALYSIS 87
intraday-trend trading, I would first use the bigger
trend on the daily chart. Usually, the moves tend to
be stronger when the intraday trend goes in the
same direction as the daily trend. If I were scalp-
ing, then the trend on the five-minute chart mat-
ters more than the trend on the daily chart. My
trend concerns are focused on the next bigger time
frame. If the two trends match up, then the trade
usually goes a lot better for me. The chances of a
successful trade are also increased.
Logarithmic versus Arithmetic ScalingLogarithmic or arithmetic scaling makes a differ-
ence in trendlines. Should you go for logarithmic
or arithmetic scaling? Again, the answer depends
on your style of trading. For shorter time frames,
arithmetic scaling seems to work better than loga-
rithmic scaling. This is because the range usually is
not big enough to make much of a difference to be
scaling otherwise. I have always kept an arith-
metic scale on my intraday trading activities. It has
worked for me and I am sure it will work for you.
For longer-term trading, logarithmic scaling is
probably the way to go. It allows the trader to com-
pare the rise and fall as a percentage. It puts every-
thing into a better perspective instead of
magnifying it as arithmetic scaling would. As you
can see in Figure 7.20, a view of Qualcomm toward
the end of the Internet bubble, stocks with big ver-
tical moves are better viewed in logarithmic scale.
Trendline ValidityIn order to draw a trendline, you need to connect
at least two (2) low points or two (2) high points in
the chart. The more points these lines connect to,
the more valid the trend. This is the same school of
thinking as the theory of support or resistance.
Trendlines also act as a support or resistance area.
When the price pulls back down to the trendline,
traders who have missed the initial run are waiting
on the sidelines for pullbacks or bounces. If a lot of
these pullbacks or bounces are bought or sold into,
then the trend is confirmed and it is a lot more
valid. What we do not want to see when marking
trendlines is the acceleration away from the lines.
This is a signal that panic buying or selling is
occurring and that a reversal may be imminent.
GAPS
A gap occurs when the opening price is signifi-
cantly different from the closing price. The gap
could be up or down depending on the buying or
selling pressures that built up between trading
periods.
More often than not, gaps are news-driven. Pos-
itive news generates buying interests and negative
news brings in sellers. If a company reports good
earnings that beat estimates after the market
closed, buying interest will be generated overnight.
If a company misses estimates, selling interests will
come in overnight. Winning a large contract is pos-
itive news. When a biotech company fails to get
FDA approval for a drug, it is very negative news.
So is bankruptcy. As technical analysts, you do not
need to read every piece of news on the wire. The
news itself does not matter much. Price action tells
it all. What matters is whether the opening price
14762_Chua_2p_c07.j.qxp 2/2/07 11:35 AM Page 87
gaps up or down and whether a news event is
behind this gap. The most powerful and reliable
signals that gaps can generate are those that come
without any news.
When buying pressures build up overnight,
88 SAMMY CHUA’S DAY TRADE YOUR WAY TO FINANCIAL FREEDOM
market makers and specialists are faced with an
order imbalance. There are more orders to buy
than to sell. In order to find equilibrium, they need
to move prices higher to find more sellers. This
way, they can transact all the buy orders they have.
7.20 Trendlines on Logarithmic and Arithmetic Scale
� LOGARITHMIC AND ARITHMETIC SCALING affect the slope of the trendline you draw. Both of these charts are of the same period on QCOM. The onlydifference is the scaling. Notice how much steeper the trendlines are on thearithmetic scale. For analysis over longer periods, it is better to use thelogarithmic scale.
14762_Chua_2p_c07.j.qxp 2/2/07 11:35 AM Page 88
TECHNICAL ANALYSIS 89
Prices open at a much higher price than the previ-
ous close. If the opening price is higher than the
high of the previous session, then it is considered a
full gap up. Otherwise, it is known as a partial gap
up. Depending on your trading style, full gaps and
partial gaps present their own unique trading
opportunities. Long-term traders concern them-
selves with full gaps, while the short-term traders
benefit from both partial gaps and the full gaps.
When selling pressures build up overnight,
market makers and specialists are faced with sell
order imbalances. More orders to sell than to buy
have come in while the market was closed. To bal-
ance these orders and get them executed, the mar-
ket maker or specialist brings the price down to
attract more buyers. This is why prices open at a
lower price than the previous session. If the open-
ing price is lower than the previous session’s low,
then it is considered as a full gap down. An opening
price that is higher than the previous session’s low
will be considered a partial gap down. Short- and
long-term traders can also find opportunities in
these gaps.
The types of gap that interest me more are the
full gaps. They can be up or down. A full gap up
has to open above the previous session’s high, and
a full gap down has to open below the previous
session’s low. These generate more powerful sig-
nals and can be traded with much better reliability
and success. With more than 9,000 different stocks
available to trade in the United States, you will
find these gaps occurring on a daily basis. Concen-
trating on these setups alone can be profitable.
There are several types of full gaps. They are
common gaps, breakaway gaps, continuation
gaps, and exhaustion gaps. Learn to distinguish
each of their characteristics early and you can get
in early on powerful trends.
Common GapsAs the name implies, common gaps occur more
frequently than other gaps. They tend to show up
a lot more during a sideways market. For trading,
they are considered the least important of all the
gaps. There is no follow-through; prices tend to
return to the gap; and the gap is quickly closed
within a few days.
You can spot these gaps by checking volume.
Volume usually increases, but is never extremely
high. This slight increase shows the gap’s failure to
generate buying interest. Buyers and sellers are
indifferent. This is confirmed by the lack of follow-
through to a new high or new low.
Most professionals would trade against the
direction of common gaps. Because prices tend to
return and close the gap, a nice profit can be made
by trading against the gap. The practice of trading
against the gap is also called fading the gap. When
you fade the gap, wait for confirmation of the
directional change. Then act on it. It is never a
good idea to jump in without proof. Use the 1-2-3-
reversal method or the break of support or resis-
tance levels to enter these trades. Remember, the
trade should be against the direction of the gap. If
the gap is up, then your trade should be to go
short. If the gap is down, then your trade should
be long.
The Intel chart in Figure 7.21 shows many
14762_Chua_2p_c07.j.qxp 2/2/07 11:35 AM Page 89
common gaps. On all the common gaps, volume
either shrank or stayed the same. Increases were
slight and insignificant.
Breakaway GapsBreakaway gaps are one of the most powerful sig-
nals in trading. They occur when prices take off
from an area of congestion and start a new trend.
Heavy volume confirms the move. This gap can
remain open for a long time. Prices usually follow
through to the direction of the gap within a short
period of time.
A breakaway gap to the upside is usually fol-
lowed by new highs for a few days in a row. A
breakaway gap to the downside establishes a new
90 SAMMY CHUA’S DAY TRADE YOUR WAY TO FINANCIAL FREEDOM
low for several days in a row. Getting in on these
gaps early can result in a nice profit.
Volume levels are the best confirmation of these
gaps. They should be high on the day of the gap. I
like to see a minimum 100 percent increase in vol-
ume. There is no maximum volume number. The
higher the volume, the more powerful the move
will be. Heavy volume comes only with institu-
tional participation. With an upside gap, heavy
volume means that institutions are buying aggres-
sively. Institutions such as mutual funds tend to
hold onto their positions for the long term. If
mutual funds are buying and holding, you will
have decreasing supply. If demand stays constant,
then prices should head up soon.
7.21 Common Gaps
� COMMON GAPS HAPPEN VERY OFTEN. They show up more often on a sidewaysmarket. INTC is in a trading range. In this chart, I have identified five of thesegaps. Notice how little change there is on the volume on these gaps. It eithershrank or stayed basically the same.
14762_Chua_2p_c07.j.qxp 2/2/07 11:35 AM Page 90
TECHNICAL ANALYSIS 91
On a downside gap, heavy volume is a good
indication that institutions are selling aggressively.
There probably has been a fundamental change in
the security, and institutions are unloading their
positions. When mutual funds get rid of their
shares, supplies to the public will rise. A rising
supply with constant demand is a good recipe for
the price to drop.
On the days following the breakaway gap, vol-
ume should remain higher than normal for several
days in a row. It is a good sign of continuing pres-
sures around the security. Professionals do not
trade against the direction of a breakaway gap.
Once volume confirms the gap, they will trade
with the gap. If the gap is to the upside, go long
early and place a protective stop at the lower rim
of the gap. Once it is profitable, use a trailing stop
to exit the position.
In the IBM example shown in Figure 7.22, the
breakaway gap took the stock from a price of $96
to a high of more than $130 in a few months.
Notice that the gap was confirmed in the next few
days by a higher high and above-average volume.
This came with a more than 100 percent increase
in volume. Getting in early on the long side is ben-
eficial.
Our next example is a company called Copper
Mountain Networks (CMTN), another high flyer
7.22 Bullish Breakaway Gaps
� THIS CHART SHOWS A BULLISH BREAKAWAY GAP on IBM. There are twoconfirmations for this type of gap. The first is the heavy volume found on thefirst day of the gap. The second is the follow-through on the prices. IBMestablished higher prices on the next two trading sessions.
14762_Chua_2p_c07.j.qxp 2/2/07 11:35 AM Page 91
during the Internet bubble. A breakaway gap
marked the end of the uptrend and the beginning
of a long, long downtrend, as shown in Figure 7.23.
An early short trade on CMTN would have made
a lot of money. From a gap down price of $105.88,
the stock eventually ran down to $0.65. New lows
and above-average volume validated the break-
away gap. With a breakaway gap to the downside,
the initial stop-loss point should be placed just
above the low of the previous day. A valid break-
away gap should never close the gap and get that
far up in price. Once the position becomes prof-
itable, I would use a trailing stop to maximize
profits.
Although I love to talk about winners, paying
92 SAMMY CHUA’S DAY TRADE YOUR WAY TO FINANCIAL FREEDOM
attention to losers is important. The next example,
eBay, shows a case of failure.
As shown in Figure 7.24, eBay had a break-
away gap on October 19. Volume confirmed the
move early in the day. It ended with nearly dou-
ble the average volume. However, volume fell on
the days following the breakaway gap. Newer
lows were not established. Instead, the price
moved up to fill and close the gap. This position
should have been exited when the price failed to
establish newer lows. At the least, the position
should have been stopped-out once it broke the
rim of the gap (marked by the stop-loss point on
chart). It is better to exit this position and reeval-
uate the opportunity.
7.23 Bearish Breakaway Gaps
� THIS IS AN EXAMPLE OF A BEARISH BREAKAWAY GAP. Heavy volume and adownward follow-through in price are the confirming signals you are lookingfor. CMTN reversed its uptrend on this breakaway gap and completelycollapsed in price in the following months. Note the placement of the stop-loss point if you had entered a short trade on the breakaway.
14762_Chua_2p_c07.j.qxp 2/2/07 11:35 AM Page 92
TECHNICAL ANALYSIS 93
As you can see from this example, breakaway
gaps can still fail. That is the nature of trading.
There is only one sure thing in this business: You
will, from time to time, take a loss. As long as the
loss is controlled, you stand to make a lot of
money, especially if you let your winners run.
Continuation GapsContinuation gaps occur much like breakaway
gaps. The main difference is that they occur in the
middle of a powerful trend instead of at the begin-
ning. Volume is also a confirming factor, but usu-
ally the increase is not as heavy as in the
breakaway gap. A stock with a 50 percent increase
in volume qualifies as a possible continuation gap
candidate.
The last confirmation comes when prices reach
new highs or new lows for several days after a gap.
An exhaustion gap might be in the works if prices
fail to follow through. Once confirmed, continua-
tion gaps provide a good target for how far the
trend is likely to go. First, measure the initial move
from the base of the reversal to the gap. Then pro-
ject this from the gap in the direction of the trend
to get your profit-taking point.
Professionals trade continuation gaps like a
7.24 Failed Breakaway Gap
� NOT ALL BREAKAWAYS WORK OUT AS EXPECTED. This chart of eBay is just aquick reminder that they can fail. Even though we had volume and priceconfirmation on this eBay trade, the stock rose and hit our stop-loss point. Thistrade was exited with a loss. If we held on longer (hoping that things wouldturn), the small loss would have become a lot greater as the price of eBay rose to over $65.
14762_Chua_2p_c07.j.qxp 2/2/07 11:35 AM Page 93
breakaway gap. They trade with the trend, in the
same direction of the gap. If the gap is to the
upside, they go long. A stop-loss order is placed
just under the high of the previous day. If the gap
is to the downside, they go short. A stop-loss order
should be placed just above the low of the previ-
ous day. A valid continuation gap should follow
through in the same direction quickly. Bounces
and pullbacks should never get that far up or
down (see Figure 7.25).
The chart on eBay shows a continuation gap on
April 18. Volume had a slight increase of 50 per-
cent. Confirmation came when volume continued
94 SAMMY CHUA’S DAY TRADE YOUR WAY TO FINANCIAL FREEDOM
to stay high and actually surged by 100 percent on
the second day after the gap. The price also con-
firmed the move with new highs.
You would go long on this position. Your stop-
loss point would be slightly below the rim. Prices
should not drop that far down. To get your initial
profit target, measure the distance between point
A and point B. Project this value to arrive at point
C. The two distances should be equal. Once the
price gets to your projected profit point, tighten
your stop. While buying momentum remains
strong, hold the long position. Maximize your
profits with the use of a trailing stop to exit.
7.25 Continuation Gap
� A CONTINUATION GAP occurs after a stock has already raised off its bottom.Volume and price follow-through are the confirmations you are looking for.You can easily estimate the move on a continuation gap by measuring thedistance between points A and B and projecting that upward. This should allowyou to get the price target at point C.
14762_Chua_2p_c07.j.qxp 2/2/07 11:35 AM Page 94
TECHNICAL ANALYSIS 95
Exhaustion GapsExhaustion gaps appear at the end of a trend.
Prices do not follow through to a new high during
an uptrend; or, during a downtrend, the price fails
to establish new lows. Instead, the direction turns
around and the gap is closed. At first glance,
exhaustion gaps look like continuation gaps. Vol-
ume comes in at a high level. But the price fails to
follow through to the direction of the gap. Confir-
mation comes when the price reverses back into
the gap and closes the gap.
Exhaustion gaps offer excellent trading oppor-
tunities. They mark the end of a trend. Profession-
als would trade in the opposite direction of the
gap. If the direction of an exhaustion gap is down,
the trader would go long once prices break back
into the gap. A protective stop should be placed
slightly below the most recent low. If the direction
of an exhaustion gap were up, go short once the
price breaks below and starts filling the gap. Place
a stop-loss order slightly above the most recent
high. The chart of IBM in Figure 7.26 shows an
exhaustion gap. After the gap, the price failed to
establish new lows except for the day after. Price
then went sideways. This tells us that the bears
have lost control of the market and the bulls are
now evenly matched. A break to the upside con-
firms the exhaustion gap.
7.26 Exhaustion Gap
� THIS TYPE OF GAP occurs at the end of a trend. On a downtrend, prices areunable to follow through to the downside. Instead, they consolidate and beginto close the gap. Enter a long trade when prices move back into the gap, andplace a stop-loss at the last support.
14762_Chua_2p_c07.j.qxp 2/2/07 11:35 AM Page 95
A long position should be entered once it breaks
back and starts filling the gap at $105. A stop-loss
order should be placed just below the low estab-
lished on July 6 at around $99. Use the trailing stop
techniques described earlier in the support and
resistance section to maximize profits on this trade.
Note that IBM rose to a high of $134 after the trend
reversed on an exhaustion gap (see Figure 7.26).
BASIC CHART PATTERNS
All traders should have the ability to recognize
basic chart patterns. They are popular and widely
followed. Because they are widely followed, the
patterns have a tendency to follow through. The
following are some of the most basic patterns.
Double Top and Double BottomDouble top and double bottom patterns are gener-
ally found at the end of a trend. They are also
called trend-reversal patterns.
The double top pattern is considered bearish. It
is usually found at the end of an uptrend and looks
like the letter M. The two peaks, or “tops,” in price
characterize this pattern. Volume on the second
peak is usually lower than on the first peak. This
gives you a clue to the possible formation. Interest
has waned. Buyers are not pushing the price up on
the second run. This pattern is formed with the
break of the last support, also called the neckline
(see Figures 7.27 and 7.28).
A good example of the double top pattern was
formed by the Nasdaq Composite in 2000 (see the
chart in Figure 7.29).
96 SAMMY CHUA’S DAY TRADE YOUR WAY TO FINANCIAL FREEDOM
● There is a clear uptrend.
● Two peaks were formed.
● Volume on the second peak dried up, which means
buyers could be exhausted.
The most popular way to trade this pattern is to
go short after the price breaks below the neckline.
The maximum stop-loss point would be at the
7.27 Double Top Pattern
� DOUBLE TOP PATTERNS are usually bearish, occurringat the end of an uptrend.
7.28 Double Top Trade Setup
� A DOUBLE TOP PATTERN should be traded on the shortside. Enter into a short position once the prices havebroken the neckline. Place a stop-loss order slightlyabove the second peak.
14762_Chua_2p_c07.j.qxp 2/2/07 11:35 AM Page 96
TECHNICAL ANALYSIS 97
7.29 Nasdaq Composite Double Top
� SPOTTING THE NASDAQ COMPOSITE DOUBLE TOP would have saved a lot ofheartache for the average investor. It had a great uptrend going at point 1. But,it formed the two peaks at point 2. Volume confirmed this pattern at point 3.Notice how much lower volume was on the second peak. This tells us that thebuyers were completely exhausted. They did not have the strength to move theprices up any further.
7.30 Double Bottom Pattern
� DOUBLE BOTTOM PATTERNS are bullish patterns. Theyoccur very often at the end of a downtrend.
7.31 Double Bottom Trade Setup
� A DOUBLE BOTTOM PATTERN should be traded on thelong side. Enter a long position when the price breaksthe neckline. Place a stop-loss order slightly below thesecond bottom.
14762_Chua_2p_c07.j.qxp 2/2/07 11:35 AM Page 97
98 SAMMY CHUA’S DAY TRADE YOUR WAY TO FINANCIAL FREEDOM
neckline with a stop below the second bottom (see
Figure 7.31).
The example CTXS chart in Figure 7.32 shows a
classic double bottom.
● There is a general decline in pricing.
● Two bottoms have formed.
● Volume dries up on the second bottom
● Note, volume returns on the breakout.
● In the case of a double bottom pattern, go long once
the price has broken past the neckline.
● The maximum stop-loss point would be at the second
bottom.
7.32 CTXS Classic Double Bottom
� (1) AN INITIAL DOWNTREND, (2) TWO CLEAR BOTTOMS, AND (3) DECREASINGVOLUME between the first and second bottoms make this a classic example ofa double bottom pattern. Go long when prices get past the neckline.
second peak (see Figure 7.28). Double bottom pat-
terns are bullish. They are found at the end of
downtrends. A double bottom looks like the letter
W (see Figure 7.30). The two lows, or “bottoms,” in
pricing characterize this pattern. Volume on the
second bottom is usually a lot lower than on the
first. This means selling interest was not as strong
as during the first run. The sellers are unable to
break past the last support level. Buyers have
pushed the price up. This pattern is formed with
the break of the last resistance, also called the neck-
line. The most popular way to trade a double bot-
tom pattern is to go long after prices break the
14762_Chua_2p_c07.j.qxp 2/2/07 11:35 AM Page 98
ability of resolving to the upside. This is why sym-
metrical triangles are often called continuation pat-
terns and can be bullish or bearish, depending on
the trend prior to the pattern formation.
There are two ways to trade triangles. The first is
to determine whether the stock was in an uptrend
or a downtrend prior to the pattern formation.
With an uptrend, enter on a break of the trend-
line. The stop-loss point should be at the last sup-
port. The initial target is a break of the highest
resistance (see Figure 7.34A).
With a downtrend, also enter on a break of the
trendline. The stop-loss point should be at the last
resistance. The initial target is a break of the lowest
support (see Figure 7.34B).
Ascending triangles are considered bullish
because they typically resolve to the upside. They
are more reliable when found in an uptrend. Price
resistance causes the top part of the triangle to be
formed. Buyers become exhausted when the price is
reached. However, the selling pressure weakened
TECHNICAL ANALYSIS 99
TrianglesThere are several types of triangles, including
symmetrical triangles, ascending triangles, and
descending triangles.
A symmetrical triangle pattern can be both a
bullish and a bearish pattern. It is an area of inde-
cision where buying and selling pressures are
almost equal. Each wave of buying is met with
sellers, and waves of selling are met with buyers.
The effect is that the most recent high is lower than
the previous high and the most recent low is
higher than the previous low. In effect, there is no
trend to follow. The shape formed during this
period is a sideways triangle. Typically, volume
diminishes during this period (see Figure 7.33).
Eventually, the period of indecision is resolved.
Prices move out of the formation on heavy volume.
These patterns are likely to end up in the direction
of the original trend. If the price was in a downtrend
prior to this pattern, it will probably explode to the
downside. If it was in an uptrend, it has a high prob-
7.33 Symmetrical Triangle Pattern
� THIS PATTERN MARKS A PERIOD OF INDECISION. It can be bullish or bearish.Its nature depends on the prior price action. If prices were on an uptrend, thenthis pattern is bullish. If they were on a downtrend, then this pattern is bearish.
14762_Chua_2p_c07.j.qxp 2/2/07 11:35 AM Page 99
every time, causing a higher low to be formed.
These higher lows cross the upward-slanting line
when you connect the lows.
The price eventually breaks through the resist-
ance, and the price goes up. It should be noted that
volume usually decreases while it is moving side-
ways and resurfaces again on the breakout (see
Figure 7.35A).
100 SAMMY CHUA’S DAY TRADE YOUR WAY TO FINANCIAL FREEDOM
For the ascending triangle, make sure of the
trend prior to its formation. Unless it was on an
uptrend, it is best not to trade this pattern. If it is on
an uptrend, enter a trade if the stock breaks the last
resistance. The stop-loss point should be at the last
support (see Figure 7.35B).
Descending triangles are generally considered
bearish. They are more reliable to trade when
7.34 Symmetrical Triangle Trade Setup
� WITH AN UPTREND, enter the trade on a break of the trendline; stop-loss should be at the last support. On a downtrend,also enter the trade on a break of the trendline; stop-loss should be at the last resistance.
7.35 Ascending Triangle Pattern and Trade Setup
� THIS BULLISH PATTERN is characterized by a series of higher lows, with the highs ending in the same resistance level.Enter a long trade once the price has broken through the resistance. Place a stop-loss order slightly below the last minor support.
A B
A B
14762_Chua_2p_c07.j.qxp 2/2/07 11:35 AM Page 100
TECHNICAL ANALYSIS 101
found on a downtrending stock. Unlike the
ascending triangle, it is the bottom that appears
flat. The top part of the triangle slants downward.
The initial drop attracts buyers at the support
level, and the selling pressure ends. Price reverses
and is later met with selling.
The selling pressure ends around the support
level, but this time, the buying pressure ends up a
lot weaker. It does not go as far as the previous
run. This establishes the lower high. Eventually,
the selling pressure breaks the support level,
bringing in a new wave of sellers as traders exit
their positions. Like the previous triangle forma-
tions, volume tends to diminish, and it forms the
pattern and returns on the breakdown of the sup-
port (see Figure 7.36A).
With descending triangles, make sure the trend
prior to formation was down. My entry would be
after the stock breaks the price-support level. The
stop-loss point should be at the last resistance (see
Figure 7.36B).
Head and Shoulders TopThis is generally regarded as a reversal pattern. It
is a bearish pattern. You often see these patterns at
the end of an uptrend. They tend to be more reli-
able when found there. The left shoulder is started
on a normal breakout with heavy volume. At the
peak of the left shoulder, sellers were able to
reverse the trend and push the prices back down.
The support that it finds on the sell-off marks the
beginning neckline. (See Figure 7.37.)
From the support area, buyers were able to
push the price to a new high. This marks the top of
the “head.” The head is usually formed on
decreasing volume. This indicates that there were
not as many buyers on this last wave. The head is
formed when the selling pressure is strong enough
to break the uptrend line. It reverses only at an
area of previous support. The point of reversal
marks the continuing neckline. (Connect the
beginning neckline and the continuing neckline to
determine the trendline.)
7.36 Descending Triangle Pattern and Trade Setup
� THIS BEARISH PATTERN is characterized by a series of lower highs, with the lows ending in the same support level.Enter a short trade once prices have broken through the support. Place a stop-loss order slightly above the last minor resistance.
A B
14762_Chua_2p_c07.j.qxp 2/2/07 11:35 AM Page 101
However, this next rally fails to take out the pre-
vious high. The peak of this rally marks the right
shoulder. A break of the neckline would complete
the right shoulder formation and the head and
shoulders pattern. Volume on the right shoulder is
usually lighter than at the head. This indicates that
buyers are exhausted. A break of the neckline usu-
ally brings in more sellers and an increase in vol-
ume, as buyers are now getting out of their
positions (see Figure 7.37).
How do you trade this pattern? The best trade is
usually to go short when the price breaks the neck-
line. If you miss the first entry, the pattern often
gives you another chance by pulling back to the
neckline once more. The stop in both cases would
be placed at the high on the right shoulder.
102 SAMMY CHUA’S DAY TRADE YOUR WAY TO FINANCIAL FREEDOM
The good thing about a head and shoulders for-
mation is that it gives you an idea of the possible
depth of the run. Your profit target can easily be
estimated by measuring the distance between the
head and the neckline. If A is the distance from the
head and the neckline, then you should see an
approximate price decline of B, where B is the
same value as A.
Suppose the head has a price of $50 and the
neckline is at $45. The value of A would be $50
minus $45, or $5. Research has shown that the
probability of decline B equaling the value of A is
very high. If we entered at the neckline $45, we can
hold until it gets near the $40 mark. This is because
when B equals A, a value of $5, then $45 minus $5
will give us a target price of $40 (see Figure 7.38).
7.37 Head and Shoulders Top Pattern
� THIS PATTERN IS GENERALLY BEARISH, and can signal a downside reversal.Three peaks characterize it. They are the left shoulder, the head, and the rightshoulder. Notice the lower right shoulder. This tells us that buyers wereexhausted even before prices rose to the previous high.
14762_Chua_2p_c07.j.qxp 2/2/07 11:35 AM Page 102
TECHNICAL ANALYSIS 103
Reverse Head and ShouldersThe reverse head and shoulders pattern is also
known as an inverted head and shoulders pattern,
or the head and shoulders bottom. This is a reversal
pattern. It is, however, a bullish pattern. These pat-
terns are most reliable when found at the end of a
downtrend. Buyers enter the picture at the low
found on the left shoulder. The point that selling
pressure overpowers the buyers again marks the
beginning neckline. The return of sellers to the
market ultimately pushes the price to a new low
“head” (see Figure 7.39). However, this new low is
quickly turned back. In this case, the buying pres-
sures are strong enough to break the trendline and
test the last resistance. Selling pressures reemerge
and the market falls again.
This time, however, the selling pressure fails to
take out the last low. This higher low forms the
right shoulder. The neckline is drawn from the
points of the last two resistance levels. A break of
the neckline completes the reverse head and shoul-
ders pattern. Volume in this case would be heaviest
on the left shoulder and decline into the head, and
it would decline even more into the right shoulder.
7.38 Head and Shoulders Top Trade Setup
� YOU CAN ENTER THIS TRADE AT TWO POINTS. The first is on the break of theneckline. Usually, prices will give you a second entry on this trade when itbounces back up. The neckline (previously a support level) will now becomethe resistance. In both cases, enter a short position. Place a stop-loss order atthe last minor resistance. Your profit target can be calculated by measuringdistance A between the head and the neckline and projecting it down. Thedistance between A and B should be equal.
14762_Chua_2p_c07.j.qxp 2/2/07 11:35 AM Page 103
This shows that sellers are getting weaker and
weaker. They are completely exhausted at the right
shoulder and unable to bring the price to a new
low. It should be noted that volume usually comes
in during the rally off the low. Pushed by this
added volume, the buying pressure breaks the
trendline. Finally, volume comes in again at the
break of the neckline.
Here’s the best method of trading a reverse
head and shoulders formation: Go long on the
stock after it breaks the neckline. Again, these pat-
terns have a tendency to pull back for a second
entry. Usually, this shakes out weak traders who
are not sure of the position. They get shaken out on
this pullback only to see the price go away from
104 SAMMY CHUA’S DAY TRADE YOUR WAY TO FINANCIAL FREEDOM
them. The stop-loss point in both cases would be at
the last support (see Figure 7.40).
The target is measured the same way as the
head and shoulders pattern. The distance between
the neckline and the head gives you a good idea of
how far it will run.
WedgesThe wedge formation appears similar to the sym-
metrical triangle. Both patterns have trendlines
that intersect or converge. However, the difference
between the two patterns is a noticeable slant,
which can be upward or downward in direction.
If the slant is downward, it is considered a
falling wedge. A falling wedge is generally a
7.39 Reverse Head and Shoulders Pattern
� THIS PATTERN IS GENERALLY BULLISH. You will find three bottoms on thispattern. They are also called the left shoulder, the head, and the right shoulder.In this case, the right shoulder is higher than the head. This tells us the sellingpressures were unable to bring the prices down as hard as in the priorsession.
14762_Chua_2p_c07.j.qxp 2/2/07 11:35 AM Page 104
TECHNICAL ANALYSIS 105
bullish pattern, whether found on an uptrend or a
downtrend. This pattern is characterized by a
series of lower highs and lower lows.
An upward slant is considered a rising wedge
(see Figure 7.41A). The rising wedge is considered
a bearish pattern whether it is found on an uptrend
or a downtrend. This pattern is marked by its
series of higher highs and higher lows.
As with triangles, volume usually falls during
the period of sideways movement (see Figure
7.41B). It generally returns on the breakout or a
breakdown of the formation. The best way to trade
wedges is to wait for a break to the upside or
downside. Go long on a falling wedge or go short
on a rising wedge once a break occurs. Your stop-
loss point should be at the last support for a falling
wedge and at the last resistance for a rising wedge.
Flags and PennantsFlags and pennants are usually considered contin-
uation patterns. They typically occur right after a
big, quick surge or a big drop in price. The market
at this point is pausing and consolidating. It is get-
ting ready for the next move. Research has shown
that flags and pennants are reliable continuation
patterns.
7.40 Reverse Head and Shoulders Trade Setup
� THERE ARE ALSO TWO ENTRY POINTS FOR THIS TRADE. The first is on the breakof the neckline and the second entry is when prices pull back down to theneckline. Notice how the prior resistance level now becomes a support. In bothcases, enter a long position. Place a stop-loss order at the last minor support.To get a profit target, calculate distance A between the head and the necklineand project it up. The distance between A and B should be equal.
14762_Chua_2p_c07.j.qxp 2/2/07 11:35 AM Page 105
Bullish flags are formed by a series of lower
tops and lower bottoms, with a pattern slanting
against the trend. However, unlike wedges, their
trendlines run parallel to each other. On the other
hand, bearish flags are made up of a series of high
tops and higher bottoms, and their trendlines also
run parallel to each other (see Figure 7.42).
Pennants look like symmetrical triangles. The
only difference is that pennants are usually smaller
in size and much shorter in duration. The market
is merely taking a brief pause from its rapid rise or
rapid fall.
The trade for both pennants and flags has to be
in the original direction of the large move. If the
prior move is up, get ready to go long when it
breaks the trendline. If the prior move is down, get
ready to go short when the price breaks the trend-
line. Volume is a big indicator of this pattern. For
both pennants and flags, it should contract on the
sideways move and increase again on the breakout.
106 SAMMY CHUA’S DAY TRADE YOUR WAY TO FINANCIAL FREEDOM
RectanglesRectangle patterns contain price movements
within two parallel trendlines, or a channel. The
price stays within the channel because buyers and
sellers are evenly matched. The upper line of the
rectangle represents resistance, where the sellers
turn back the buyers. The lower line represents
support, where the buyers turn back the sellers.
Rectangles are also a type of continuation pat-
tern. They tend to move to the original direction of
the trend. The longer the rectangle, the more pow-
erful the move will be (see Figure 7.43).
There are two ways to trade rectangles. The first
method involves trading while the issue is still
within the channel. Look at the trend. If the origi-
nal trend is up, go long at the support area with a
stop just below this area. Your initial target is to
sell the position when it gets to the resistance level.
However, if there is a lot of buying momentum,
consider holding the position a little longer to see
7.41 Rising and Falling Wedge Pattern
� THE FALLING WEDGE IS A BULLISH TRIANGLE PATTERN whether found in a downtrend or an uptrend. Notice the downwardslant of both trendlines. The rising wedge is a bearish triangle pattern. It does not matter if the prior trend is up or down.Notice how both trendlines are slanted upward.
A B
14762_Chua_2p_c07.j.qxp 2/2/07 11:35 AM Page 106
TECHNICAL ANALYSIS 107
if it will break out of the channel. If the original
trend was down, go short at the resistance level
with a stop just above that level. The initial target
would be the support level. If the position gets to
the support level with increasing volume, you
might consider holding a little longer to see
whether the selling momentum is able to break the
support level (see Figure 7.44).
The second method is to wait for a break of the
support or resistance, then enter on the pullback or
the bounce. It is common to see support and resis-
tance areas swap duties once a break occurs. A
support area usually becomes the resistance, while
a resistance area turns into the support area. This is
where I would enter the trade.
Once I enter the trade, my stop-loss point
7.42 Flags and Pennants Pattern
� TWO THINGS DEFINE THE FLAGS PATTERNS. The first is the large “pole,” andsecond is the short period of consolidation. The consolidation period looks likea rectangle but is slanted. For bull flags, the slant is downward. For bear flags,the slant is upward. Pennants are also defined with a pole and a consolidationperiod. However, in this case, the consolidation period resembles a smallsymmetrical triangle.
14762_Chua_2p_c07.j.qxp 2/2/07 11:35 AM Page 107
would be set just slightly below the breakout or
breakdown point. If the break is valid, the price
should not move back into the rectangle. The easi-
est way to project the initial price target would be
to measure the height of channel A in Figure 7.45.
108 SAMMY CHUA’S DAY TRADE YOUR WAY TO FINANCIAL FREEDOM
The price rise B should equal the height of the
channel.
There is also a way to project the maximum
price rise (see Figure 7.46). It is done by measuring
the length of the rectangle (C) and projecting it
7.43 Rectangle Pattern
� THE RECTANGLE IS A CONTINUATION PATTERN. It can signal eitheraccumulation or distribution. If the prior trend was up, then this pattern isbullish. If it was down, then this pattern is bearish.
7.44 Rectangle Trade Setup Number 1
� ONE OF THE WAYS YOU CAN TRADE THE RECTANGLE is to capture the range it is in. If the stock is previously on an uptrend,go long when prices fall to the support level. Place a stop just below the support. Take profits when it goes back up to theresistance level. If the stock is previously on a downtrend, go short when prices bounce off the resistance level. Place astop just above the resistance. Take profits when it falls to the support level.
14762_Chua_2p_c07.j.qxp 2/2/07 11:35 AM Page 108
TECHNICAL ANALYSIS 109
vertically (D) from the breakpoint (support line if
bullish and resistance line if bearish). Remember,
in this case, this is the maximum price rise you can
expect. The probability of the price reaching this
point is not as high as the probability of it reaching
the initial price target (see Figure 7.46).
With these patterns, volume tends to decrease
while the stock is moving sideways. A break of the
support or the resistance is usually followed by a
marked increase in volume. If volume failed to
materialize on the breakout, the move is more sus-
ceptible to failure.
Rounded Bottoms and Rounded TopsA rounded bottom can be a bullish reversal pattern
or a continuation pattern. It consists of a long side-
ways move in which the pattern resembles the
shape of a saucer, called the saucer pattern.
As a reversal pattern, the duration has to be a lot
longer. It is a period of consolidation in which sen-
timent turns from bearish to bullish. Ideally, the
low established on the rounded bottom is a signif-
icant low. The low of the pattern should not equal
more than a 50 percent retracement of the run. As a
rule, the lower the value of the pullback, the faster
it will break out. In both cases, the wider the con-
solidation period, the harder and longer the secu-
rity will tend to run.
The rounded top is basically an upside-down
pattern of the rounded bottom. It is a bearish pat-
tern whether found on an uptrend or on a down-
trend (see Figure 7.47). The best way to trade a
7.45 Rectangle Trade Setup Number 2
� THE SECOND WAY TO TRADE A RECTANGLE is to wait for it to break the support or resistance level. Go long once it breaksthe resistance level. Place a stop just below the last resistance. If prices were to break a support, go short on the bounceback to the support level. Place a stop-loss order just slightly above the support level. Calculate your initial price target bymeasuring distance A between the support and resistance levels. Project up or down, depending on long or short, to getyour target. Distance A should be equal to distance B.
14762_Chua_2p_c07.j.qxp 2/2/07 11:35 AM Page 109
rounded top is to go short on a breakdown of the
rim. With a rounded bottom, go long on a breakout
of the rim. The initial target point would be the dis-
tance between the rim and the high or the low,
depending on the pattern. The breakout or break-
down should be accompanied by strong volume.
The stop-loss point should be slightly inside the
support or resistance level or the rim. Like the rec-
tangle, a valid break should not come back too far
into the pattern.
Cup with HandleWilliam O’Neil, founder of Investor’s Business
Daily, popularized the concept of the “cup with
handle” in his 1988 book, How to Make Money in
110 SAMMY CHUA’S DAY TRADE YOUR WAY TO FINANCIAL FREEDOM
Stocks. It is considered a bullish continuation pat-
tern. A prior uptrend must exist. It is better if the
trend is not extended. An extended run decreases
the upside potential of the breakout.
The pattern consists of two parts: a cup and a
handle. The cup is a consolidation area that forms
after an advance in price. It can look like a deep
bowl or a rounded bottom. It should resemble the
letter U, not the letter V.
Ideally, the depth of the cup should be no more
than 38 percent of the prior advance. In extreme
cases, the retracement can be as much as 62 per-
cent. As a rule, the lesser the retracement percent-
age, the more powerful the run will be on the
breakout. The handle forms after a test of the prior
7.46 Rectangle—Estimating Maximum Price Targets
� TO ESTIMATE THE MAXIMUM PRICE TARGET, measure width C. Rotate the measurement up andproject this up or down from the support and resistance levels. This gives you the optimisticprojections of a breakout or breakdown run.
14762_Chua_2p_c07.j.qxp 2/2/07 11:35 AM Page 110
TECHNICAL ANALYSIS 111
resistance. It can be a flag or a pennant. The depth
of the handle is usually a lot shallower than the
cup depth. Maximum depth is about 38 percent. A
breakout of the resistance signals a continuation
on the uptrend.
Figure 7.48 shows an example of this pattern.
You have all three key components. The pattern
has a clear uptrend and it has formed a nice cup.
The pullback low on the cup is just below the 38
percent mark. It has also formed a nice flag.
After you identify this pattern, go long on the
breakout. The initial stop should be at the last sup-
port. Your target can be obtained by measuring the
distance between the right side of the cup (A) and
7.47 Rounded Bottoms and Rounded Tops Pattern
� A ROUNDED BOTTOM ON A DOWNTRENDING STOCK is a bullish signal. A rounded top on an uptrending stock is also bullish.Note that breakout points are found at the rim. Rounded tops on both downtrending and uptrending stocks are bearish.The rim shows the point where stock should break downward.
14762_Chua_2p_c07.j.qxp 2/2/07 11:35 AM Page 111
112 SAMMY CHUA’S DAY TRADE YOUR WAY TO FINANCIAL FREEDOM
the low of the cup. This same distance can be pro-
jected from the breakout point to calculate the ini-
tial target point (B). Distance A should be the same
as distance B (see Figure 7.49).
VOLUME ANALYSIS
Volume is an important part of basic technical
analysis. It serves to refute or confirm certain price
movements. Breaks of support and resistance lev-
els have to be followed with heavier volume. Gaps
are also confirmed by heavy volume. A common
gap does not have volume, while the other types
have higher-than-average volume. Heavy volume
is also necessary in the days following the gap. If
not, a failure could be in the works.
When a stock is in a trend, volume should
increase when prices are going in the direction of
the trend. If the trend is up, then volume should be
higher on days when prices are going up and
lighter on the days when it heads down. A stock on
a downtrend should have the opposite volume
effects. Down days should be marked by higher
volume, while up days should be marked by lower
volume. This makes sense if you think of the
underlying reasons for an uptrend. A stock can
sustain an uptrend only if there continue to be
more buyers than sellers. For it to continue on a
downtrend, it must continue to have more sellers
than buyers.
If volume fails to materialize in the direction of
the trend, it will serve as a signal that the trend
could be reversing. You often find this situation
with double top and double bottom patterns and
7.48 Cup with Handle Pattern
� WILLIAM O’NEIL POPULARIZED THE CUP WITH HANDLEPATTERN. The pattern looks exactly like its name: a cupwith a small handle on it. It is a bullish pattern.
7.49 Cup with Handle Pattern Trade Setup
� TRADE THIS PATTERN ON THE LONG SIDE once it hasbroken out of the resistance area. Place a stop-lossslightly below the last support. Calculate your initialprofit target by measuring the depth (A) of the cup andadding this value to your entry price. Initial profit targetamount B should be the same as the amount A.
14762_Chua_2p_c07.j.qxp 2/2/07 11:35 AM Page 112
TECHNICAL ANALYSIS 113
the head and shoulders pattern. This is also the
case when the stock is in a trading range. Volume
usually decreases when it gets near a support or
resistance area, signaling that interest has waned.
It picks up again when it reverses and heads in the
opposite direction (see Figure 7.50).
Volume bars are the easiest way to analyze
volume. They compare volume on a given day
with volume on previous days. Take note of the
trend. Is volume increasing or decreasing? If vol-
ume bars are getting taller and taller, then vol-
ume is increasing. This confirms the direction of
the move. If volume bars are shrinking, then vol-
ume is decreasing. This means the direction of
the current move could be in jeopardy. Volume
bars can also be flat. They neither confirm nor
refute the trend. They are considered neutral.
Usually, the trend will stay intact when you see
flat bars.
Always keep an eye on volume. It reveals the
underlying strength of a move better than price
action itself. Weak volume means momentum
could end soon. Strong volume confirms the
momentum. Pay attention to climactic volume.
This usually comes at the end of a hard run. It
could be after a big rise in price or an extreme sell-
off. Climactic volume is at least 100 percent more
than the average daily volume on the security. The
higher volume serves to confirm a possible rever-
sal of the short-term trend.
Let’s take the chart of CECO in Figure 7.51 as an
example. There were two periods in which volume
surged a lot higher than normal. In period A, vol-
ume was more than 10 times higher than the daily
average. However, this is not climactic volume
because of its location in relation to the trend. In
the early part of a trend, heavy volume serves as a
confirmation of the strength of that direction. In
7.50 Volume Analysis
� VOLUME IS A VERY IMPORTANT INDICATOR. Decreasing volume places thedirection of the trend in doubt, while increasing volume supports the directionof the price movement. Flat volume neither confirms nor disputes the move. Itis considered neutral.
14762_Chua_2p_c07.j.qxp 2/2/07 11:35 AM Page 113
this case, it was down. Prices fell afterward to a
low of $22.
The scenario for period B is different. It already
had eight prior days of decline before heavy
volume came in. This is climactic volume. Such
114 SAMMY CHUA’S DAY TRADE YOUR WAY TO FINANCIAL FREEDOM
high volumes flush out weak traders. Nervous
investors are getting out. Those who remain are
fully committed to the security. After the sell-
ers are gone, only buyers are left. The price will
rise. ●$
7.51 Climactic Volume
� THE CHART OF CECO SHOWS two high-volume days. However, only at point Bis it considered climactic volume. This is because it occurred at the end of arun. All the weak hands were flushed out from the run. This allowed the pricesof CECO to recover from $25 to around $33.
14762_Chua_2p_c07.j.qxp 2/2/07 11:35 AM Page 114
CHAPTER 8
CandlestickChartingTechniques
• Spotting Heavy Buying and Selling Pressures
• Comparing Buying and Selling Pressures
• Spotting Indecision with Candlesticks
• Understanding Intraperiod Activity
• Candlestick Positions
• Bullish Patterns
• Bearish Patterns
14762_Chua_2p_c08.j.qxp 2/2/07 11:35 AM Page 115
Candlestick patterns are formed using four
price points. They are the opening price, the high-
est price of the period, the lowest price of the
period, and the closing price. If the closing price
is above the opening price, you have an open can-
dlestick pattern. The body is normally displayed as
white. Lately, many traders are using green
instead of white. If the closing price is below the
opening price, then you have a closed candlestick
pattern. The body is normally displayed as black,
although the use of red has recently grown in
popularity. The lines above and below the body
represent the range that prices have traveled
through the time period. They are called wicks,
tails, or shadows. The top of the upper wick marks
the high price of the period, and the bottom of the
lower wick marks the low price of the period (see
Figure 8.1).
Traders believe candlestick charts are easier to
interpret than traditional bar charts. Because of the
way they are drawn, candlesticks make it easy to
do the following:
Visually spot periods of heavy buying pressure and peri-
ods of heavy selling pressures.
116 SAMMY CHUA’S DAY TRADE YOUR WAY TO FINANCIAL FREEDOM
Compare these buying and selling pressures from period
to period.
Visually spot periods of indecision, marking a possible
direction reversal.
Get an idea of what transpired within the period.
SPOTTING HEAVY BUYING AND SELLING PRESSURES
The white marubozu candlestick can quickly iden-
tify periods of heavy buying. This pattern is some-
times referred to as the 20/20 candlestick. The
reason is simple. For the candlestick to qualify as a
20/20 candle, the opening price has to be located
below the bottom 20 percent of the candlestick
range. The closing price has to be above the top 20
percent of the candlestick range. Both patterns you
see in Figure 8.2 qualify as white marubozus.
Long white candlesticks show heavy buying
pressures. The longer the white candlestick, the
higher the closing price compared with the open.
This indicates that prices rose significantly from
open to close. The buyers were aggressive through-
out the whole period.
IT IS BELIEVED THIS CHARTING METHOD was started by the Japa-
nese to trade rice in the seventeenth century. Homma, a legendary rice
trader from Sakata, is credited with its further development and popu-
larity. Today, the candlestick charting technique has become a standard for
day trading.
14762_Chua_2p_c08.j.qxp 2/2/07 11:35 AM Page 116
CANDLESTICK CHARTING TECHNIQUES 117
Of the two patterns shown in Figure 8.2, the can-
dlestick on the right is the most bullish. This shows
buyers pushing the price up from the open to the
close. That is why there are no wicks on either end.
The high of the period is the same as the close, and
the low of the period is the same as the open.
White marubozu candlesticks are generally con-
sidered bullish indications. When found at the end
of a decline, they mark a strong support level. They
are great indications that bearish sentiment could be
reversing. A follow-through of the bullish momen-
tum is likely the next day. However, if this pattern is
found after a long advance, it could signal an over-
bought situation. Buyers have become too aggres-
sive and too optimistic. A reversal could be at hand.
8.1 Different Types of Candlestick Patterns
� THE NAME OF THE CANDLESTICK DEPENDS ON the location of the close in relation to the open. For open candlesticks, theclose is higher than the open. For closed candlesticks, the close is lower than the open. For doji candlesticks, the close isthe same as the open.
8.2 Definition of a White Marubozu
� TO QUALIFY AS A WHITE MARUBOZU, the open has tobe located at the bottom 20 percent of the candlestickrange and the close has to be above the top 20percent of the candlestick range. Both patterns shownhere would qualify.
14762_Chua_2p_c08.j.qxp 2/2/07 11:35 AM Page 117
The black marubozu candlestick identifies peri-
ods of heavy selling activity. It is also referred to as
a 20/20 candlestick. But with this candlestick, the
opening price should be on the top 20 percent of
the candlestick range and the closing price should
be below the bottom 20 percent of the candlestick
range (see Figure 8.3).
Long black candlesticks show heavy selling
pressure. The longer the black candlestick, the
lower the closing price relative to the open. It indi-
cates that sellers were aggressive during this
period, causing a significant drop in price at the
close of the period.
Of the two patterns shown in Figure 8.3, the one
on the right is the most bearish. It shows that sell-
ers were in control the whole period. They began
selling at the open and sold until the close of the
period. That is why the open price is the same as
118 SAMMY CHUA’S DAY TRADE YOUR WAY TO FINANCIAL FREEDOM
the high price, and the closing price is the same as
the low price.
Black marubozus are generally considered bear-
ish patterns. It shows that sellers were in full con-
trol of the period. Usually, when found at the early
stages of a decline, they signal more selling pres-
sure ahead. After a long advance, a black mar-
ubozu will mark a possible resistance area. The
bears now have control of the market. After several
periods of decline, black marubozu candlesticks
can indicate panic selling or capitulation. Climactic
selling can be a signal of a possible turning point.
COMPARING BUYING AND SELLING PRESSURES
Candlesticks make it easy to compare similar or
contrasting pressures. When you place candle-
sticks of different periods side by side, you get a
quick sense of the urgency or the aggressiveness of
the buying or selling. The longer the candles, the8.3 Definition of a Black Marubozu
� TO QUALIFY AS A BLACK MARUBOZU, the close has tobe located at the bottom 20 percent of the candlestickrange and the open has to be above the top 20 percentof the candlestick range. Both patterns shown herewould qualify.
8.4 Comparing Selling Pressures
� IT IS EASY TO TELL THAT THE CANDLESTICK on the righthad a lot more selling pressure. The bigger the blackbody on a candlestick, the heavier the selling pressure.
14762_Chua_2p_c08.j.qxp 2/2/07 11:35 AM Page 118
CANDLESTICK CHARTING TECHNIQUES 119
wider the price range in the period. If sellers were
aggressive throughout the entire period, the clos-
ing price will be far lower than the open price and
the range will be wide. If selling pressures were
not as hard, the closing price will not be far away
from the open price. This creates a smaller body
than the previous scenario.
In Figure 8.4, there is little doubt which period
had more selling pressures. The length of the bod-
ies tell the story. The same applies to open candle-
sticks. The longer the length of the body, the
stronger the buying pressure in that period. In Fig-
ure 8.5, the buyers were a lot more aggressive dur-
ing the period on the right.
SPOTTING INDECISION WITH CANDLESTICKS
Two patterns indicate indecision within the period.
They are doji patterns and spinning tops.
Dojis are formed when opening and closing
prices are almost the same. They are important
candlesticks to note on their own, but they provide
an even more powerful signal when found in com-
bination with other patterns. We will discuss these
combinations later in this section.
The length of the upper and lower wicks can
differ. This makes the candlestick look like a cross,
an inverted cross, or a plus sign. On their own, doji
patterns give us a clue to the indecision area. They
are neutral patterns. They can be biased to either
bullish or bearish directions. It all depends on the
price action that came before it and the confirming
candlestick that follows it. In the ideal doji, the
open and close are equal in price, and the upper
and lower wicks are of essentially the same length.
Within this period, prices moved up and then
down, or they moved down and then up from the
open. In both cases, it closed at or near the opening
level. The result is a standoff. Neither buyers nor
sellers were able to gain control. The market is
indecisive (see Figure 8.6).
The long-legged doji (see Figure 8.7) is the big
brother of the pattern in Figure 8.6. It also has
upper and lower wicks that are roughly the same
length. But the wicks are a lot longer. These pat-
terns suggest indecision within the period: Prices
traded well above the open. They also traded well
below the open. The end result, however, was the
same. It closed at or near the opening price. Again,
neither buyers nor sellers had control of the mar-
ket in that session. They might have had control
within certain segments, but overall, the market
ended in a tie.
Spinning tops also suggest indecision. They are
8.5 Comparing Buying Pressures
� IT IS EASY TO TELL THAT THE CANDLESTICK on the righthad a lot more buying pressure. The bigger the whitebody on a candlestick, the heavier the buying pressure.
14762_Chua_2p_c08.j.qxp 2/2/07 11:35 AM Page 119
120 SAMMY CHUA’S DAY TRADE YOUR WAY TO FINANCIAL FREEDOM
cousins of the doji pattern. They are candlesticks
with a long upper shadow, long lower shadow,
and small body. The small body is what separates
spinning tops from dojis. I have also heard these
patterns referred to as hi-waves. Activity within
this period also shows indecision. The small body
shows that the close was not that far from the
open, while the wicks indicate that buyers and
sellers were active in the session. As with a doji,
the result is much like a standoff. Neither the bulls
nor the bears were able to gain the upper hand.
After a long advance, a spinning top can indi-
cate a possible change of direction. After a long
decline, a spinning top indicates that sellers are not
as strong as before. It could signal a potential
change in trend (see Figure 8.8).
UNDERSTANDING INTRAPERIOD ACTIVITY
A candlestick shows the struggle between buyers
and sellers over a given period of time. The top of
the candlestick represents the winning zone for
buyers, and the bottom represents the winning
zone for sellers. The mark, in this case, is the clos-
ing price. The closer to the high the mark gets at
the end of the period, the closer the buyers are to
claiming victory. On the other hand, sellers can
claim victory if the mark is down near the bottom.
Candlesticks indicate how the struggle between
buyers and sellers might end. Here are the most
important indications given by candlesticks:
White marubozu or long white candlestick. These indi-
cate that buyers were aggressive and in control for the
whole or most of the period (see Figure 8.9).
8.6, 8.7, and 8.8 Spotting Indecision
� THESE THREE CANDLESTICK PATTERNS INDICATEINDECISION. Buyers and sellers were unable to gain anupper hand. Prices essentially stayed the same at the endof the period. These patterns often mark reversal points.
14762_Chua_2p_c08.j.qxp 2/2/07 11:35 AM Page 120
CANDLESTICK CHARTING TECHNIQUES 121
Black marubozu or long black candlestick. These indi-
cate that sellers were aggressive and in control for the
whole or most of the period (see Figure 8.10).
Dojis or spinning tops. These candlesticks with small
bodies tell us that neither buyers nor sellers were in con-
trol. Prices finished about where they started (see Figure
8.11).
Hammer or hanging man pattern. The long lower tail
indicates sellers had control of the market for part of the
period, but lost it by the end. Buyers made a comeback
and were able to push the price up considerably from the
low (see Figure 8.12).
Inverted hammer or shooting star. A long upper wick
indicates that buyers controlled the market for part of the
session, but lost control by the end as sellers were able to
aggressively push the market back down (see Figure 8.13).
Long-legged dojis or spinning tops. A long upper and
lower wick indicates that both buyers and sellers had their
moments during the trading session, but neither could
claim a significant victory in the end. The result was a tie
(see Figure 8.14).
8.9 White Marubozus
� WHITE MARUBOZUS, orlong white candlesticks,indicate that buyers wereaggressive and in controlfor the whole or most ofthe period.
8.10 Black Marubozus
� BLACK MARUBOZUSindicate that sellers wereaggressive and in controlfor the whole or most ofthe period.
8.11 Dojis or Spinning Tops
� THESE CANDLESTICKS WITH SMALL BODIES tell us thatneither buyers nor sellers were in control. Prices finishedabout where they started.
8.12 Hammer Pattern
� THESE CANDLESTICKSWITH SMALL BODIES tellus that neither buyers norsellers were in control.Prices finished aboutwhere they started. Thelong lower tail indicatessellers had control of themarket for part of theperiod, but lost it by theend. Buyers made acomeback and were ableto push the price upconsiderably from the low.
8.13 Inverted Hammer
� A LONG UPPER WICKINDICATES that buyerscontrolled the market forpart of the session, butlost control by the end assellers were able toaggressively push themarket back down.
14762_Chua_2p_c08.j.qxp 2/2/07 11:35 AM Page 121
What Candlesticks Can’t Tell YouCandlesticks can give you an idea of the end result
of the session, but they have limitations. They do
not reflect the sequence of events between the
open and close. They show the relationship
between the open and the close. They also show
the relationship of these two to the high and the
low of the session.
We can’t tell whether buyers stepped in first or
sellers stepped in first in a doji pattern unless we
reduce the time frame. Let’s take a long-legged
doji pattern as an example. The activity within the
period could be reflected by either one of the
charts shown in Figure 8.15. Perhaps sellers
stepped in first and pushed the price down, which
created the low. Then buyers stepped in and
pushed it up hard, which created the high. Later
on, sellers stepped in again to push the price back
down to close at or near the open price. Or the
122 SAMMY CHUA’S DAY TRADE YOUR WAY TO FINANCIAL FREEDOM
sequence could have been the other way around.
The buyers could have come in first, followed by
sellers. And at the end of the period, buyers came
in again.
Both scenarios would produce the same pat-
tern. The missing information could be vital
because buyers and sellers might not have been
totally exhausted at the end of the period. The
market might have closed before they were able to
complete their trades. This is why technical analy-
sis of candlesticks is never based on just one can-
dlestick pattern. Complete analysis is done in
combination with other periods and other factors.
Candlesticks do not reflect volatility (see Figure
8.15). Looking at a white marubozu candlestick,
most traders would simply assume that prices
advanced most of the session. However, if you
break the pattern down, the sequence of price
movements could be different than normally
8.14 Long-Legged Dojis or Spinning Tops
� A LONG UPPER AND LOWER WICK INDICATES that both buyers and sellers hadtheir moments during the trading session, but neither could claim a significantvictory in the end. The result was a tie.
14762_Chua_2p_c08.j.qxp 2/2/07 11:36 AM Page 122
CANDLESTICK CHARTING TECHNIQUES 123
expected. The market could have been volatile,
with price pressure shifting several times.
The trading activity that forms a particular can-
dlestick can vary. That is why candlestick patterns
work best when you use combinations and not just
a single candlestick. The example in Figure 8.15
also shows two different price movements that
could have formed a white marubozu candlestick.
During the first session, there was a small decline
off the open to form the low, a sharp advance to
form the high, and a small decline to form the
close. The second session shows three sharp
moves instead of just one. As you can see, the sec-
ond session was a lot more volatile than the first.
More CandlesticksHere are some additional patterns you should
learn to recognize.
Dragonfly Doji
This pattern forms when the open, high, and close
are equal and the low creates a long tail. The result
is a candlestick that looks like a T, with a long tail
only on the bottom. This pattern indicates that sell-
ers dominated the early part of the period and
drove the price lower. But they were not able to
keep up the pressure. By the end of the session,
buyers had pushed the price back to the opening
level.
8.15 What Candlesticks Cannot Tell You
� CANDLESTICKS CANNOT TELL YOU THE SEQUENCE OF EVENTS within the period.Both intraperiod activity charts shown here would result in the same long-legged doji pattern. Candlesticks also cannot tell you the volatility within theperiod. Both intraperiod activity charts shown here would result in the samewhite marubozu pattern. Notice the greater volatility of the period on the right.
A
B
14762_Chua_2p_c08.j.qxp 2/2/07 11:36 AM Page 123
The reversal implications of this pattern depend
on the previous price action and what happens dur-
ing the next period. The long wick provides proof of
buying pressure, but the low indicates that plenty of
sellers could still be around. If this pattern is found
after a long downtrend, it could signal a potential
bullish reversal or bottom. A bullish confirmation
would come in the form of a follow-through to the
upside the next period. After a long uptrend, the
long tail could suggest a potential bearish reversal
or top. Bearish confirmation will come in the form
of a closed candle the next period (see Figure 8.16).
Gravestone Doji
This pattern forms when the open, low, and close
are the same and the high has a long upper wick.
124 SAMMY CHUA’S DAY TRADE YOUR WAY TO FINANCIAL FREEDOM
The candlestick looks like an upside-down T.
Gravestone dojis indicate that buyers dominated
the early part of the trading session. They drove
prices higher during the session. However, they
were unable to hold their gains. Sellers resurfaced
and were able to push the prices back down to the
open price.
As with the dragonfly doji and other patterns,
the reversal implications of a gravestone doji will
depend on the previous price movement and also
on how the next period confirms this movement.
After a long downtrend, it could signal a possible
bullish reversal. After a long uptrend, they can
indicate a possible bearish reversal. Both need to
be confirmed with a follow-through to the upside
(if bullish) or downside (if bearish) to confirm the
validity of this interpretation.
Hammer and Hanging Man
These patterns look exactly the same. Their names
depend on the preceding price movement. Both
have small bodies. Both can be black or white. Both
need to have a long lower tail and a short or non-
existent upper tail. Finally, the lower tail must be at
least two times the length of the body (see Figure
8.17). As with most candlestick formations, the
hammer and hanging man require confirmation
before action.
If the pattern you see in Figure 8.18 formed after
a decline, then it is called a hammer. A hammer is a
bullish reversal pattern. It points to a possible
trend reversal. It will often mark support levels.
After a decline, hammers signal a possible return
of the buyers. The low of the long lower wick
8.16 Doji Candlestick Patterns
� THE HIGH, THE OPEN, AND THE CLOSE ARE ALL AT THESAME PRICE FOR THE DRAGONFLY DOJI, and the low, theopen, and the close are all at the same price for thegravestone doji.
Dragonfly Gravestone Doji Doji
14762_Chua_2p_c08.j.qxp 2/2/07 11:36 AM Page 124
CANDLESTICK CHARTING TECHNIQUES 125
implies that although sellers drove prices lower
during the session, they were unable to sustain the
pressure. Buyers stepped in and forced the price
back up at the end of the session. Like many of the
patterns we have discussed, hammers require fur-
ther bullish confirmation. Confirmation can come
in the form of a gap up or white marubozu candle-
stick the next period. Another confirmation would
be from increasing volume on the way up. Ham-
mers are like climactic sell-offs, and heavy volume
serves to validate the reversal even more.
If the same pattern you saw earlier formed after
an advance, then it is called a hanging man (see Fig-
ure 8.18). The hanging man is a bearish reversal
pattern. It points to a possible trend reversal. It will
often mark resistance levels. The long tail on this
pattern is a clue that sellers are now around after
the long price advance. They were able to push it
down at one point. Although they failed to keep
the price down, an action like this makes buyers
nervous. If you see this after an advance, it should
raise a caution flag on your long positions. A hang-
ing man also requires a bearish confirmation
before any action is taken. Such confirmation can
come in the form of a gap down or long black can-
dlestick on heavy volume. The chart in Figure 8.19
shows how we can identify a hanging man or a
hammer. Both patterns look alike. The hanging
man came in after a price advance, while the ham-
mer came in after a price decline. The hanging man
marked the resistance level, and the hammer
marked the support.
Inverted Hammer and Shooting Star
These patterns look like the hammer and hanging
man patterns turned upside down. The long tail is
now located above the body, and there is little or
no tail below the body. These patterns also mark
potential trend reversals, and they also require
confirming price movement during the following
period (see Figure 8.20).
Like their counterparts, their names come from
their location on the chart and the preceding price
action. If this pattern forms after an advance, it is
called a shooting star. The ideal position is a star
position (to be discussed later), hence the name.
This pattern marks a potential trend reversal. The
high usually marks a significant resistance level.
8.17 Candlestick Patterns
� THE HAMMER AND THE HANGING MAN both have thesame patterns. Their names depend on the precedingprice movement.
14762_Chua_2p_c08.j.qxp 2/2/07 11:36 AM Page 125
126
8.18 Hammer and the Hanging Man
� BOTH THE CIRCLED PATTERNS LOOK THE SAME. The one that occurred at theend of a move up is called a hanging man, and the one that occurred after adownward price move is called a hammer.
8.19 Hammer as a Reversal Indicator
� THIS CHART OF EBAY SHOWS two circled hammer patterns. Both mark thereversal points of the downtrend. They were good signals for initiating a longposition. Can you find the third one?
14762_Chua_2p_c08.j.qxp 2/2/07 11:36 AM Page 126
CANDLESTICK CHARTING TECHNIQUES 127
This candlestick pattern forms when prices
open higher than the previous period’s high. It
then advances during the session. But somewhere
within the session, selling pressure occurs and
pushes the price back down. The close is well off
the high. The result is a candlestick that has a long
upper tail and small black or white body. It can
have a small lower tail or none at all.
The ability of sellers to force the price down
should raise a caution flag in any situation. In this
case, it comes after a big move up. To qualify as a
substantial reversal, the upper tail must be at least
two times the length of the body. Bearish confirma-
tion is required after the shooting star. It can come
from a gap down or black marubozu candlestick
on heavy volume.
The inverted hammer looks exactly like a shoot-
ing star. However, the pattern is given this name
only if it forms after a decline or a downtrend. It
represents a potential trend reversal and usually
marks support levels. The long upper tail indicates
that buyers were present during the session. They
were able to push the price up, but were unable to
sustain this buying pressure. Sellers came in and
pushed the price back down. Prices closed well off
of their highs and created the long upper tail.
Although buying pressure could not be sus-
tained through the entire session, the presence of
this pressure should not be ignored. It should
raise a caution flag on any short position. The
possibility of a reversal could be in the works,
depending on the confirmation candlestick in the
next period. Bullish confirmation comes in the
form of a gap up or a white marubozu candlestick
with heavy volume.
The examples shown in Figures 8.21 and 8.22
show how to identify an inverted hammer or a
shooting star. Both patterns look alike. Note the rela-
tionship to the prior price movement. The inverted
hammer came in after a price decline, whereas
the shooting star came in after a price advance. The
shooting star marked the resistance level, and the
inverted hammer marked the support. Take note of
the confirming candlestick on the period that fol-
lowed these patterns (see Figures 8.21 and 8.22).
CANDLESTICK POSITIONS
Whereas patterns are a series of candlesticks, posi-
tions define a single candlestick in relation to the
previous candlesticks (i.e., in relation to its pattern).
8.20 Candlestick Patterns
� THE INVERTED HAMMER AND THE SHOOTING STAR bothhave the same patterns. Their names depend on thepreceding price movement.
14762_Chua_2p_c08.j.qxp 2/2/07 11:36 AM Page 127
Star PositionA candlestick is said to be in a star position when it
gaps away from the previous candlestick. The first
candlestick usually has a large body, while the sec-
ond candlestick in star position has a small body.
Due to the gap, a candlestick in a star position
appears to be isolated from the rest. It could be
from a gap down or a gap up. If it is a gap up, it is
usually preceded by a white marubozu. If it is a
gap down, it is usually preceded by a black maru-
bozu. This occurs because either buying or selling
momentum carried over to the next day. This
caused the gap. However, the gap absorbed a lot of
those pressures and almost balanced out the two
128 SAMMY CHUA’S DAY TRADE YOUR WAY TO FINANCIAL FREEDOM
parties. That is why we see the smaller range the
next day. Bear in mind that for a candlestick to be
in a star position, it does not have to have a small
range. It just needs a small body and it needs to
gap above the prior day’s high. In shooting stars
and hammers, the range is fairly wide, but the
body is small. Figure 8.23A gives you a better idea
of a candlestick in a star position.
Harami PositionA candlestick is said to be in a harami position when
it forms within the body of the previous candlestick.
The first candlestick usually has a large body, while
the second candlestick in harami has a smaller body
8.21 Inverted Hammer and the Shooting Star
� BOTH THE PATTERNS CIRCLED HERE LOOK THE SAME. The one that occurred atthe end of a move down is called an inverted hammer, and the one thatoccurred after an upward price move is called a shooting star.
14762_Chua_2p_c08.j.qxp 2/2/07 11:36 AM Page 128
CANDLESTICK CHARTING TECHNIQUES 129
8.22 Inverted Hammer as a Reversal Indicator
� NOTICE HOW THE INVERTED HAMMER shown here marked a big turnaround inprices the next day. Savvy traders who spotted this could have capitalized onthe move.
8.23 Candlestick Positions
� THIS ILLUSTRATES THE DIFFERENCE BETWEEN A STAR POSITION AND A HARAMI POSITION. Notice that in the star position,the price action on the following period is outside the body of the first period. On the other hand, the price action of thefollowing period on a harami position is all within the body of the first period.
A B
14762_Chua_2p_c08.j.qxp 2/2/07 11:36 AM Page 129
than the first. Harami means pregnant in Japanese.
If you imagine the first candlestick as being preg-
nant with the second candlestick, you can remem-
ber the harami position easily. Preferably, the upper
and lower tails of the second candlestick should be
within the first, but it is not necessary. Dojis and
spinning tops are just some of the patterns that can
form in the harami position. Figure 8.23B gives you
a better idea of the harami position.
Combination PatternsIt must be stressed that candlestick analysis should
never be based on a single candle. It should always
be combined with previous price action and a con-
firming candle. Learning to recognize combina-
tion patterns is a must for the candlestick chartist.
Combinations provide a better picture of possible
future price movements and are more reliable than
a single candlestick. These combinations fall into
two categories:
●1 Bullish patterns
●2 Bearish patterns
BULLISH PATTERNS
There are many bullish combination patterns. I
have chosen the more popular and common ones
for discussion here. They occur often and should
be part of the basic understanding of any candle-
stick chartist.
Hammer
Inverted hammer
Bullish engulfing
130 SAMMY CHUA’S DAY TRADE YOUR WAY TO FINANCIAL FREEDOM
Piercing pattern
Bullish harami
Three white soldiers
Bullish engulfing harami
Morning star
Bullish abandoned baby
The hammer and inverted hammer were cov-
ered earlier. This section focuses on the other seven
patterns. For a complete list of bullish (and bear-
ish) reversal patterns, see Greg Morris’s Candlestick
Charting Explained. With all bullish patterns, a bull-
ish confirmation has to occur. These patterns are
still considered neutral. No clear direction has
been established. Action should not be taken. Bull-
ish confirmation has to occur within a short
period. Maximum effectiveness of these patterns is
only about two weeks. More often, it is a lot less
time. Bullish confirmation has to occur within one
to three days. Move on to another security if you
do not see confirmation quickly. The longer it takes
to confirm, the weaker the setup.
Bullish Engulfing PatternA bullish engulfing pattern consists of two candle-
sticks (see Figure 8.24). The first candlestick,
which is a period earlier, is a closed pattern, mean-
ing the close was lower than open. It should be a
black candlestick. The upper and lower tails are
usually fairly short, although this is not necessary.
This indicates a small range compared with the
opening and closing price. The second candlestick
is an open pattern, or a white candlestick, mean-
14762_Chua_2p_c08.j.qxp 2/2/07 11:36 AM Page 130
CANDLESTICK CHARTING TECHNIQUES 131
ing the close was higher than the open. The white
body of this second candlestick is larger than the
black body of the first candlestick. The white body
of the second candlestick has to completely cover
the black body of the previous candlestick for it to
qualify as a bullish engulfing pattern. Ideally, the
white body of the second candlestick should also
engulf the upper and lower tails of the first can-
dlestick.
A couple of things must happen in this pattern
for it to form. The open of the second candlestick
must be lower than the previous close. This means
that the price gapped down at the open on the sec-
ond period. The close of the second candlestick
must be higher than the previous open. This
means buying pressure must be strong enough to
bring the price back above the open price, closing
above it. Note that it does not necessarily have to
break the high of the first candle. Figure 8.24A is an
illustration of the bullish engulfing pattern.
As the name implies, this pattern is bullish. It
indicates that buyers have seized control from sell-
ers. The first candlestick is closed. It indicates that
sellers were in control and forced the price to close
lower than the open. In the next period, the control
of the sellers was short-lived. Buyers were able to
push the price up. This rally proved so powerful
that the price went past the previous open and
closed above this price. The resulting candlestick is
one in which the white body completely “engulfs”
8.24 Bullish Combination Patterns
� THESE TWO CANDLESTICKS MAKE UP THIS COMBINATION PATTERN. Notice how the open on the second candlestick (on the left) is below the close of the first candlestick and the close on the second candlestick is above the open of thefirst candlestick. To make it easier to remember this combination, try merging the two candles together. The result is an open hammer pattern.
A
B
14762_Chua_2p_c08.j.qxp 2/2/07 11:36 AM Page 131
that of the previous candlestick, hence the name
bullish engulfing pattern.
As with most candlesticks, prior price action
and ensuing price action need to be taken into con-
sideration. These patterns tend to work best dur-
ing a decline or a downtrend. If you add the other
aspects of technical analysis to this pattern, an
even better trade signal can be generated.
The easiest way to remember this pattern is to
imagine a marriage of the two candlesticks into
one. If you use the opening price of the first candle,
the highest and lowest price between the two peri-
ods, and the close of the second candle, you should
get an open hammer (see Figure 8.24B).
132 SAMMY CHUA’S DAY TRADE YOUR WAY TO FINANCIAL FREEDOM
The chart of NVDA (see Figure 8.25) is an exam-
ple of a bullish engulfing pattern. Notice that there
are two of these patterns. The first combination
clearly shows the increased strength of the buyers.
There was a tremendous amount of buying pres-
sure. It caused the range to be almost twice that of
the normal daily range. The confirming bullish
candlestick came in the next day. This tells us that
on a short-term basis, we can expect the stock to
head up.
Three days later, the stock showed signs that
buying momentum had stopped and sellers had
again controlled the session. This is evidenced by
the down candlestick. But that was short-lived, as
8.25 NVDA Bullish Engulfing Pattern
� THE FIRST BULLISH ENGULFING PATTERN on this chart of NVDA marked asignificant turning point in the direction for this stock. Notice how it followedthrough again to the upside on another bullish engulfing pattern.
14762_Chua_2p_c08.j.qxp 2/2/07 11:36 AM Page 132
CANDLESTICK CHARTING TECHNIQUES 133
the next day another bullish engulfing pattern
appeared. This was followed by a bullish confir-
mation. The stock gapped up the next day and
went higher, and later the stock went significantly
higher.
Piercing PatternTwo candlesticks are required to form a piercing
pattern. The first candlestick is a relatively long
black marubozu. The second candlestick is a white
marubozu that opens below the previous period’s
closing price and closes above the midpoint of the
black marubozu.
The charts in Figure 8.26 illustrate the bullish
piercing pattern. Piercing patterns are bullish for-
mations. You usually find them after a decline.
They mark a potential reversal point or change in
trend. The pattern itself is not a strong enough sig-
nal. A bullish confirmation is needed for trading. It
can come in the form of a gap up or another white
marubozu following the pattern. Strong or increas-
ing volume must follow these moves to the upside.
Again, the best way to remember these patterns
is to imagine a marriage of the two candlesticks.
Using the open of the first, the highest and lowest
price of the two periods, and the closing price of
the second period, you will find that the pattern
transforms into a closed hammer.
Bullish Harami PatternThe bullish harami pattern is made up of two can-
dlesticks. The first has a large body and the second
a small body. The second candlestick has to be in
a harami position, so the body of the first has to
8.26 Bullish Combination Patterns
� THESE TWO CANDLESTICKS MAKE UP THIS COMBINATION PATTERN. Notice how the open on the second candlestick is belowthe close of the first candlestick and the close on the second candlestick is above the midpoint of the first candlestick. Tomake it easier to remember this combination, try merging the two candles together. The result is a closed hammer pattern.
A B
14762_Chua_2p_c08.j.qxp 2/2/07 11:36 AM Page 133
completely encompass the second. These patterns
are also called inside range days, or IRDs, because the
range of the second day is completely found within
that of the first. There are four possible combina-
tions in this pattern: white/white, white/black,
black/white, and black/black (see Figure 8.27).
In Beyond Candlesticks, Steve Nison asserts that
any of the four combinations of colors can be con-
sidered a harami. He believes the most bullish are
those that form with a white/black or white/white
combination. The large body of the first candlestick
implies strong buying pressure throughout the
period. The smaller candlestick indicates a consoli-
dation period. The white/white and white/black
bullish harami are likely to occur instead of the
black/black or black/white harami.
If the prior trend was on a decline, a black/black
or black/white combination is regarded as a bull-
ish harami. The first long black candlestick tells us
that sellers were aggressive, but it could signal a
134 SAMMY CHUA’S DAY TRADE YOUR WAY TO FINANCIAL FREEDOM
possible capitulation. The ensuing candlestick is
formed with a gap up at the open. This indicates
that buying pressures increased between sessions,
and it could signal a possible reversal.
One similarity between the four combinations
stands out. The color of the first candlestick does not
really matter. What is more important is the body of
the second candlestick. The smaller the body of the
second candlestick, the more likely it is to reverse.
The best second candlestick you can find is a doji. It
has a very small body or none at all. The chances
of a reversal are greatly increased whenever this
occurs. It tells us that, after a period of heavy decline
(black marubozu), sellers were unable to push the
price down. Hence the narrower range. On the
other hand, after a prior period of heavy advance
(white marubozu), sellers were also unable to move
the price down, even though the price had gapped
against the previous upward direction.
Look at the chart in Figure 8.28. Pay attention to
8.27 Bullish Combination Patterns
� THIS ILLUSTRATES THE FOUR POSSIBLE COMBINATIONS FOR THE BULLISHHARAMI. Two candlesticks make up this combination pattern. Notice how therange of the second candlestick is always within that of the first candlestick.
14762_Chua_2p_c08.j.qxp 2/2/07 11:36 AM Page 134
CANDLESTICK CHARTING TECHNIQUES 135
the following: the downtrend and the occurrence
of the harami pattern. At this point, we still do not
know whether it is bullish or bearish. It is with the
gap upward that a long candlestick confirmed the
bullishness. Two more harami patterns followed.
They are white/white and white/black combina-
tions. These patterns are considered bullish and a
sign of possible continuation of strength.
Three White SoldiersThe three white soldiers pattern is made up of
three white marubozu candlesticks formed in con-
secutive periods. In and of itself, the white
marubozu candlestick pattern indicates a lot of
buying pressure throughout the period. When
three of these occur side by side, the buying has
become urgent. Every move up brings in more
buyers, as short sellers cover their positions. If you
combine the three candlesticks, you form one giant
white marubozu. This shows the power the bulls
have over the market (see Figure 8.29).
Two things affect the bullish nature of this combi-
nation pattern. First is the past price action. Second
is the range or size of the three candlesticks. If this
combination occurs at the beginning of a reversal
and just below a resistance level, then chances of the
bullish action continuing are greatly increased. This
is a good scenario for a possible break of resistance.
When the range is shrinking as it gets close to resis-
tance, however, you should be cautious. It suggests
that buying momentum is losing steam. While sell-
ers never really controlled the session, the strength
behind these two pressures is now starting to bal-
ance out. Soon, it could tip to the side of the sellers
again. Do not initiate a long position when you see
this pattern. Although this combination is also bull-
8.28 Bullish Harami Pattern
� THE SERIES OF THREE BULLISH HARAMI PATTERN (circled) on this stockmarked a nice turnaround in price.
14762_Chua_2p_c08.j.qxp 2/2/07 11:36 AM Page 135
ish when it occurs after a breakout of resistance,
caution should be taken when entering into a long
position. If the ranges of the three candlesticks are
roughly equal, the chances of the buying momen-
tum continuing in the next period are a lot better.
However, if the range is increasing or decreasing,
then it is preferable not to enter a long position. Wait
for a pullback to enter. If the range is gradually
decreasing, then buying momentum is definitely
waning. On the other hand, if the range is increas-
ing rapidly between the three candlesticks, the
action could be caused by panic (see Figure 8.30).
Bullish Engulfing HaramiAs the name suggests, the bullish engulfing harami
pattern consists of two combination patterns. The
first is a harami pattern and the second an engulf-
136 SAMMY CHUA’S DAY TRADE YOUR WAY TO FINANCIAL FREEDOM
ing pattern. However, the two pillars that frame the
pattern on the two sides have to be white maru-
bozus (see Figure 8.31). The first combination
found on the bullish engulfing pattern is a harami
pattern. Of the four possible harami combinations,
only two are shown here, the white/white and the
white/black combinations. The initial move on this
combination has to be a big surge in buying inter-
est. Usually, this is caused by news or some new
development pertaining to the stock.
The next two or three candlesticks serve as a
consolidation period as the market tries to absorb
the buying pressure of the first day. These candle-
sticks can be of any possible combination. The best
ones are those where the range of all candlesticks
is low. It tells us that buyers are present, absorbing
the selling pressure.
8.29 Bullish Combination Patterns
� THIS PATTERN IS MADE UP OF THREE WHITE MARUBOZU CANDLESTICKS.Combining all three candlesticks together gives you one big marubozucandlestick. It gives you an idea of how strong the buying pressures were onthis stock.
14762_Chua_2p_c08.j.qxp 2/2/07 11:36 AM Page 136
CANDLESTICK CHARTING TECHNIQUES 137
After the selling pressures are absorbed, a new
surge in interest comes in as buyers become
aggressive again. This forms the second part of the
combination, the bullish engulfing pattern.
You find these patterns at major reversals. News
concerning the stock can cause the initial surge. As
the trading community grasps the news, a surge in
buying pressure takes hold and the price goes up
again. A breakout of the high with volume is a big
confirmation.
Morning StarThe morning star pattern consists of three candle-
sticks. They are usually formed after a decline and
can mark a support and a possible trend reversal
area. The first candlestick is a closed pattern and
8.30 Three White Soldiers
� THE RANGE AND LOCATION OF THIS PATTERN would affect the bullish nature of this pattern. This is an illustration of whatincreasing range, decreasing range, and constant range would look like for this combination pattern.
8.31 Bullish Combination Patterns
� THE BULLISH ENGULFING HARAMI PATTERN is made up of two separate combination patterns. The firstcombination is the bullish harami pattern. The secondcombination is the bullish engulfing pattern.
14762_Chua_2p_c08.j.qxp 2/2/07 11:36 AM Page 137
138 SAMMY CHUA’S DAY TRADE YOUR WAY TO FINANCIAL FREEDOM
After a downtrend, the dojis and spinning tops
indicate a tie between the bulls and bears. Neither
the buyers nor sellers scored a decisive victory in
the session. This standoff is resolved when a long
white candlestick forms to indicate a reversal of
trend. It is preferable but not necessary to see a gap
up on the long white candlestick.
A close relative to this pattern is the bullish
abandoned baby. It consists of the same three can-
dlesticks, and in the same order. Here’s the only
difference between the morning star and the bull-
ish abandoned baby: On the bullish abandoned
baby, gaps are found on both sides of the doji or
spinning top (see Figure 8.33).
The gap between the first and second candle-
should have a relatively long body. The middle
candlestick is a doji or spinning top that forms
after a gap down at the open. The last candlestick
is an open pattern, with a relatively long body (see
Figure 8.32).
The first candlestick should be in the direction
of the current trend, which should be down. The
closed pattern shows that sellers are still in control
and were able to push the price down to close
below the opening price. The gap on the second
candlestick indicates that selling pressure contin-
ued at the open. However, these pressures were
weak and did not persist throughout the session.
Buyers stepped in and were able to push the price
back up to end at or near the opening price.
8.32 Bullish Combination Patterns
� THE MORNING STAR PATTERN is a three-candlestickcombination pattern. The most important aspect aboutthis combination is the “star” position of the middlecandlestick.
8.33 Bullish Combination Patterns
� THE BULLISH ABANDONED BABY PATTERN looks verymuch like the morning star pattern. The only differenceis that the high of the middle candlestick is lower thanthe low of the first and third candlesticks.
14762_Chua_2p_c08.j.qxp 2/2/07 11:36 AM Page 138
CANDLESTICK CHARTING TECHNIQUES 139
stick indicates that significant selling pressure
remains. However, the gap absorbed a lot of the
selling pressure, and the security trades in a nar-
row range. It closes at or near the open price, creat-
ing the spinning top or the doji. Between the
second and third candlesticks, the gap up indicates
strong buying pressure built-up between the two
periods. A long white candlestick on the next
period confirms the reversal. No further confirma-
tion is required.
The chart in Figure 8.34 is that of eBay. Notice
the decline that preceded the doji pattern. It was in
a star position because of the gap. Finally, the gap-
up confirmed the pattern on the next candlestick.
BEARISH PATTERNS
There are also many bearish combination patterns.
Again, I have chosen to narrow the field. I have
selected the most popular and common patterns
for more detailed discussion. You can find a com-
plete list of bearish patterns in Candlestick Charting
Explained, by Greg Morris. Here are some of the
key bearish patterns.
Shooting star
Hanging man
Bearish engulfing pattern
Dark cloud cover
8.34 Morning Star Pattern: eBay
� THE CIRCLED DOJI PATTERN is in a morning star pattern. Notice how nicelyeBay’s prices reversed from the downtrend after this combination occurred.
14762_Chua_2p_c08.j.qxp 2/2/07 11:36 AM Page 139
Bearish harami pattern
Three black cows
Evening star
Bearish engulfing harami
The shooting star and the hanging man patterns
were covered earlier. The focus here is on the other
six patterns. Remember that bearish confirmations
are needed in all bearish reversal patterns. The
actual reversal signals the change in direction. Sell-
ers are now in control of the market. Without the
bearish confirmations, these patterns are consid-
ered neutral. There is no clear direction for the
market yet. All these patterns do is signal a poten-
tial resistance point. Bearish confirmation comes in
the form of a gap down or a downside follow-
through. Understand that candlestick pattern
analysis is short-term analysis. Maximum effec-
tiveness is only about two weeks, sometimes less.
Bearish confirmation has to occur within one to
three days.
Bearish Engulfing PatternThe bearish engulfing pattern consists of two
candlesticks. The first is a small white or open
candlestick and the second is a large black or
closed candlestick. The bigger it is, the more
bearish the reversal. The black body must totally
engulf the body of the first white candlestick.
Ideally, the black body should engulf the shad-
ows as well. Shadows are permitted, but they are
usually small or nonexistent on both candle-
sticks. After an advance, the second black candle-
140 SAMMY CHUA’S DAY TRADE YOUR WAY TO FINANCIAL FREEDOM
stick begins to form when residual buying pres-
sure causes the security to open above the previ-
ous close. However, sellers step in soon after this
opening gap up and begin to drive the price
down. The selling pressure proves to be so
intense that the price ends the session below the
previous open. The resulting candlestick com-
pletely engulfs the previous day’s body. This
indicates a possible reversal. A bearish confirma-
tion is needed before any action is taken (see Fig-
ure 8.35A). The easiest way to remember this
pattern is to imagine a marriage of the two can-
dlesticks into one. If you use the opening price of
the first candle, the highest and lowest price
between the two periods, and the close of the sec-
ond candle, you should get a closed shooting star
(see Figure 8.35B).
In the example we used earlier in Figure 8.28, a
bullish harami pattern marked the reversal of the
downtrend. After entering into that trade, another
combination pattern would have alerted you to
a possible bearish reversal. This is the bearish
engulfing pattern. As you see from the NVDA
chart in Figure 8.36, the bearish engulfing pattern
marked the end of the uptrend and signaled a
change of direction.
Figure 8.37 shows another example of a bearish
engulfing pattern. On the left side of the chart, you
will notice that NVDA was in a downtrend. It then
reversed up to where we now find the bearish
engulfing pattern. The gap down on the next day
was the bearish confirmation. Price subsequently
dropped from $25 to $20, where another engulfing
pattern marked the reversal.
14762_Chua_2p_c08.j.qxp 2/2/07 11:36 AM Page 140
CANDLESTICK CHARTING TECHNIQUES 141
8.35 Bearish Combination Patterns
� THESE TWO CANDLESTICKS MAKE UP THIS COMBINATION PATTERN. Notice how the open on the second candlestick is abovethe close of the first candlestick and the close on the second candlestick is below the open of the first candlestick. To makeit easier to remember this combination, try merging the two candles together. The result is a closed shooting star pattern.
8.36 NVDA Bearish Engulfing Pattern
� EARLIER WE SAW HOW THE BULLISH HARAMI PATTERN marked the reversal of the downtrend. This time the bearishengulfing pattern (circled) marked the reversal back down.
A B
14762_Chua_2p_c08.j.qxp 2/2/07 11:36 AM Page 141
142 SAMMY CHUA’S DAY TRADE YOUR WAY TO FINANCIAL FREEDOM
8.37 NVDA Bearish Engulfing Pattern
� HERE’S ANOTHER EXAMPLE of how the bearish engulfing pattern marked the reversal of the small uptrend.
Dark Cloud CoverThis pattern comprises two candlesticks. The first
is a white candlestick and the second a black can-
dlestick. Both candlesticks should have fairly large
bodies with small or nonexistent upper and lower
wicks. The black candlestick must open above the
previous close. It should also close below the mid-
point of the white candlestick’s body. If it closes
above the midpoint, it is not considered as bearish
and may not necessarily qualify as a reversal com-
bination.
Look at Figure 8.38. In this pattern, buying
momentum carried over from the first session to
the next. It caused the price to gap and open higher
in the next session. However, sellers stepped in
soon after the open and pushed prices lower. Sell-
ing pressures were strong enough to drive prices
below the midpoint of the white candlestick’s body,
but not strong enough to drive it past the previous
sessions open. Bearish confirmation in the next
period would validate the reversal (see Figure
8.38A). Again, the best way to remember these pat-
terns is to blend together the two candlesticks.
Using the open of the first, the highest and lowest
price of the two periods, and the closing price of the
second period, you will find that the pattern trans-
forms into an open shooting star (see Figure 8.38B).
The chart of ENZN in Figure 8.39 shows the
14762_Chua_2p_c08.j.qxp 2/2/07 11:36 AM Page 142
CANDLESTICK CHARTING TECHNIQUES 143
8.38 Bearish Combination Patterns
� TWO CANDLESTICKS MAKE UP THE DARK CLOUD COVER PATTERN. Notice how the open on the second candlestick is abovethe close of the first candlestick and the close on the second candlestick is below the midpoint of the first candlestick. Tomake it easier to remember this combination, try merging the two candles together. The result is an open shooting starpattern.
8.39 ENZN Dark Cloud Cover
� THE DARK CLOUD COVER PATTERN shown here on ENZN marked the reversalof a very short uptrend. This stock’s price dropped severely afterward.
A B
14762_Chua_2p_c08.j.qxp 2/2/07 11:36 AM Page 143
value of recognizing this pattern. Price action on
ENZN remains sideways for many sessions. Trad-
ing this action within the rectangle formation would
be choppy and tough. The formation of the dark
cloud cover pattern signaled a possible change. The
bearish confirmation that came afterward was a big
black marubozu candlestick, which is the most
bearish of all patterns. There were no upper or
lower tails in the pattern. This shows that sellers
were in complete control during the entire session.
The move also broke a key support level of the rec-
tangle. The price dropped from $62.50 down to $44.
Bearish Harami PatternThe bearish harami pattern is made up of two can-
dlesticks. It is a harami pattern. To qualify, the first
candlestick has to have a large body and the body
of the second candlestick has to be completely
encompassed by the first. This means that the body
of the second candlestick also has to be smaller
than the first. There are four possible combinations:
144 SAMMY CHUA’S DAY TRADE YOUR WAY TO FINANCIAL FREEDOM
White/white
White/black
Black/white
Black/black
Whether they are bullish or bearish in nature,
all harami patterns look the same. Their bullish or
bearish nature depends on two things, the preced-
ing trend and the confirming candlestick (see Fig-
ure 8.40).
Steve Nison asserts in Beyond Candlesticks that
any combination of colors can form a harami. The
most bearish are those that form with a black/white
or black/black combination. The large black body
indicates the presence of strong selling pressure that
was sustained until the session ended. The small
candlestick afterward is considered to be a period
of consolidation before continuation. After an ad-
vance, black/white or black/black bearish harami
are not as common as white/black or white/white
combinations.
8.40 Four Possible Combinations for the Bearish Harami
� TWO CANDLESTICKS MAKE UP THIS COMBINATION PATTERN. Notice how therange of the second candlestick is always within that of the first candlestick.
14762_Chua_2p_c08.j.qxp 2/2/07 11:36 AM Page 144
CANDLESTICK CHARTING TECHNIQUES 145
A white/black or white/white combination is
still regarded as a bearish harami and can signal a
potential reversal. The first long white candlestick
usually follows the direction of the trend. It shows
that plenty of buying pressure remains. The sec-
ond candlestick that follows begins with a gap
down on the open. This indicates a change of con-
trol between sessions from buyers to sellers. The
struggle that followed in the second candlestick
ends with an indecision or a tie, giving us further
proof that buyers are losing control.
A bearish confirmation on the next period
should bring action on your part. If you are long,
you should exit quickly. If you are not long, con-
sider shorting the security. The chart of JDSU in
Figure 8.41 is a good example of a bearish harami
pattern. The stock had a nice uptrend, with a big
white marubozu candlestick marking the end. The
next day, the stock gapped down and closed
down, producing the black candlestick pattern.
The next day, bearish confirmation came in the
form of a gap down. The price later dropped about
a dollar in a few days, and JDSU eventually
dropped well below $2.00.
Three Black CowsThe three black cows pattern is made up of three
black marubozu candlesticks that formed in con-
secutive periods (see Figure 8.42A). In and of itself,
a black marubozu candlestick pattern indicates a
lot of selling pressure throughout the period. If
three of these occur side by side, it means the sell-
8.41 JDSU Bearish Harami Pattern
� THE BEARISH HARAMI PATTERN (circled) marked the start of a double toppattern and the reversal of the uptrend.
14762_Chua_2p_c08.j.qxp 2/2/07 11:36 AM Page 145
146 SAMMY CHUA’S DAY TRADE YOUR WAY TO FINANCIAL FREEDOM
8.42 Three Black Cows Pattern
� THE THREE BLACK COWS PATTERN is made up of three black marubozu candlesticks. Combining all three candlestickstogether gives you one big black marubozu candlestick. It gives you an idea of how strong the selling pressures were onthis stock.
ing is urgent. Fear is probably a factor. Every move
down in price brings in more sellers. This intensity
points to opportunities on the short side. Hope-
fully, you are not in a long position as it happens.
Combining the three candlesticks together forms
one giant black marubozu. This shows the power
the bears have over the market (see Figure 8.42B).
Like the three white soldiers, two things affect
the bearish nature of this combination pattern. First
is the past price action. Second is the range or size of
the three candlesticks. If this combination occurs at
the beginning of a reversal to the downside and just
above a support level, chances are that the bearish
action will continue to improve greatly. You will
likely see a break of the support level. The only
range condition that lessens this likelihood is when
the range is shrinking as it gets close to a support.
This suggests that selling momentum is losing
steam. While buyers have yet to gain control of the
session, the strength behind these two pressures is
now starting to balance out. It could tip to the side of
the buyers soon, a bad time to open a short position.
Although this combination is also bearish when
it occurs after a breakdown of support, caution
should be taken when entering into a short posi-
tion. If the ranges of the three candlesticks are
AB
14762_Chua_2p_c08.j.qxp 2/2/07 11:36 AM Page 146
CANDLESTICK CHARTING TECHNIQUES 147
roughly equal, the chances that selling momentum
will continue into the next period are a lot better.
However, if the range is increasing or decreasing,
it is preferable not to enter a short position.
If the range is gradually decreasing, selling
momentum is definitely waning. On the other
hand, this might be a case of panic selling if the
range is increasing rapidly between the three can-
dlesticks. When the panic ends, buyers can bring
the price up with ease (see Figure 8.43).
Evening StarThe evening star pattern consists of three candle-
sticks. The first candlestick is an open candlestick
with a long white body. The second is a small can-
dlestick that gaps above the close of the first. This
candlestick can be an open or closed spinning top
pattern. It can also be a doji. If it is a doji, the pat-
tern is called an evening star doji. The last is a closed
candlestick with a long black body.
The long body of the white candlestick tells us
that buying pressure remains strong. The gap up at
the open of the second candlestick provides fur-
ther evidence of buying pressure. However, a lot of
the pressure is absorbed in the gap. The upward
momentum loses steam and the range becomes
narrow. A small candlestick forms. The battle for
control ends in a tie, indicating indecision and a
8.43 Three Black Cows
� THE RANGE AND LOCATION OF THIS PATTERN would affect the bearish nature of this pattern. This is an illustration of whatincreasing range, decreasing range, and constant range would look like for this combination pattern.
14762_Chua_2p_c08.j.qxp 2/2/07 11:36 AM Page 147
possible reversal of the trend. The chances of a
reversal increase even more if the small candle-
stick is a doji. The third long black candlestick pro-
vides bearish confirmation of the reversal (see
Figure 8.44).
A close relative of this pattern is the bearish
abandoned baby pattern. The difference is the gap
found on either side of the second candlestick. The
open of the second candlestick has to gap above the
high of the first candlestick. Plus, the open of the
third candlestick has to gap below the low of
the second candlestick. The end result is a candle-
stick that is isolated from the rest of the patterns on
the chart (see Figure 8.45).
148 SAMMY CHUA’S DAY TRADE YOUR WAY TO FINANCIAL FREEDOM
The first gap up confirms that strong buying
pressure carried into the next session. However,
buying pressure subsides after the gap up and the
security closes at or near the open. This creates
the doji.
Following the second candlestick, the price
gaps down below the low of the doji. The gap indi-
cates strong selling pressure, and the long black
candlestick confirms it. The strong and sustained
selling pressure on the third candlestick completes
the reversal. Further bearish confirmation is not
required.
The chart of eBay in Figure 8.46 started off with
an uptrend. It ended with an evening star. The
8.44 and 8.45 Bearish Combination Patterns
� THIS IS A THREE-CANDLESTICK COMBINATION PATTERN. The most importantaspect about this combination is the “star” position of the middle candlestick.The bearish abandoned baby pattern looks very much like the evening starpattern. The only difference is that the low of the middle candlestick is higherthan the high of the first and third candlesticks.
Evening Star Bearish Abandoned Baby
14762_Chua_2p_c08.j.qxp 2/2/07 11:36 AM Page 148
CANDLESTICK CHARTING TECHNIQUES 149
black confirming candlestick completes the rever-
sal. The white candlestick that followed should be
an opportunity to exit a long position or enter a
short position.
Bearish Engulfing HaramiThe bearish engulfing harami pattern consists of
two combination patterns. The first is a harami
pattern and the second is an engulfing pattern. The
end result is a pattern whose two sides are black
marubozu candlesticks.
The first combination found on the bearish
engulfing pattern is a harami pattern. Of the four
possible harami combinations, only the black/white
and the black/black combination are discussed here.
The initial move on this combination has to be that
8.46 Evening Star Pattern: eBay
� THE EVENING STAR PATTERN on eBay marked a short-term trend reversal.
8.47 Bearish Combination Patterns
� THE BEARISH ENGULFING HARAMI PATTERN is madeup of two separate combination patterns. The firstcombination is the bearish harami pattern. The secondcombination is the bearish engulfing pattern.
14762_Chua_2p_c08.j.qxp 2/2/07 11:36 AM Page 149
150 SAMMY CHUA’S DAY TRADE YOUR WAY TO FINANCIAL FREEDOM
of a big surge in selling pressure. Usually, this is
caused by bad news, a downgrade, a missed esti-
mate, or news concerning the overall sector.
The next two or three candlesticks serve as a
distribution period as the market works through
the initial selling spree of the first day. These can-
dlesticks can be of any possible combination. The
best ones show a low range of all candlesticks. This
tells us the market was deadlocked and ended
with little or no move in price.
After the buying pressures are absorbed, a new
surge in selling pressure comes in. Sellers become
aggressive again and bring the price back down to
the closing level of the first candlestick. This forms
the second part of the combination, the bearish
engulfing pattern. No confirmation is necessary
after this pattern is completed.
These patterns are found at major reversals. The
initial surge usually is a good indication of a possi-
ble change of trend direction. However, the public
mistakes it for a pullback buying opportunity and
pushes it back up. But it fails to break the last
resistance and sellers step back in, completing the
pattern (see Figure 8.47).
If you can identify these patterns at the early
stages, the possibility of a profit is high. The
trade in this case involves getting into a short
position after it breaks the low of the first candle.
You should see bearish confirmations when this
happens. Volume should pick up as buyers
from the previous two or three sessions head for
the exits. This is on top of those who went long
on the position prior to the formation of the
pattern. ●$
14762_Chua_2p_c08.j.qxp 2/2/07 11:36 AM Page 150
CHAPTER 9
Spotting Trends• Technical Indicators
• Key to Using Indicators
• Moving Averages
• Moving Average Convergence Divergence
• MACD Histogram
• Stochastic Oscillator
• Relative Strength Index
• On-Balance Volume
• Accumulation/Distribution
• Futures and Pivot Points
• Conclusion
14762_Chua_2p_c09.j.qxp 2/2/07 11:36 AM Page 151
Technical indicators are great tools when used
properly. They offer a perspective from which we
can analyze price action. They help identify trends
and their reversal points. They serve to confirm or
refute certain price actions. When they confirm,
we can hold onto the trade a little longer. When
they refute, it is time to get out.
There are three types of indicators: trend-
following indicators, oscillators, and miscella-
neous indicators. This section will concentrate on
trend-following indicators and oscillators. Many
of the miscellaneous indicators are used to analyze
the stock market in general. I believe day traders
should ignore those indicators. This applies to
swing traders who hold positions from one to five
days.
For day traders, the short-term trend is the most
important. Even in the bear market of 2000, there
were ample opportunities to go long for a few
days. On any given day, short-term traders should
follow the current microtrend. If the intraday trend
is up, do not enter short positions. If the market
152 SAMMY CHUA’S DAY TRADE YOUR WAY TO FINANCIAL FREEDOM
stays on an uptrend, go long and stay long. If the
intraday trend is down, go short and stay short. Do
this until the market tells you otherwise. You do
not need a multitude of indicators to figure out
where the market might go. Simply follow the cur-
rent microtrend.
KEY TO USING INDICATORS
Make sure you understand what indicators mea-
sure and under what conditions they work best.
Trend-following indicators work best when the
market is in an up or a down trend. They tend to
give false signals in a sideways market. Oscillators
work best when the market is in a trading range.
They catch turning points when the market is
moving sideways, but when the market is in a
trend, they produce false signals.
You can combine different indicators to capital-
ize on positive features and eliminate negative
features. The best possible combination is an
TECHNICAL INDICATORS
WHAT ARE TECHNICAL INDICATORS? A technical indicator is
a series of data points that are computed using the price and
volume actions for a given period. Indicators use several
pieces of data: the open, the close, and the high and low of each period. Some
indicators also consider the volume of each period. Each indicator uses a
specific formula to arrive at the data points.
14762_Chua_2p_c09.j.qxp 2/2/07 11:36 AM Page 152
SPOTTING TRENDS 153
oscillator and a trend-following indicator. Never
combine two indicators of the same type. If you
use two trend-following indicators, price action
that goes with or against the trend will cause the
same results on both indicators. The best results
are usually gained when conflicting indicators
both generate the same signals, whether it is a buy
or a sell signal. Make sure to use an indicator from
the trend-following group and another from the
oscillator group.
Never ignore the price action of a stock. Sup-
pose an indicator has generated a buy signal.
When you look at the chart, you realize the stock is
still trading within a channel or rectangle. The
mere fact that a signal has been generated should
not result in immediate action. Wait for confirming
price actions before taking a position. I would
make sure there is a break of the rectangle, with
volume, before I entered a long position. This is
why the most basic understanding of technical
analysis is necessary.
One final word before we get started with indi-
cators. There are more than 100 technical analysis
indicators, with more being built every day. There
is even technical analysis software that allows
traders to create their own indicators. However
the oldest indicators still work the best. They have
withstood the test of time. Most traders use the
older indicators. This alone increases the likeli-
hood of a successful trade. This section discusses
only these time-tested indicators. Don’t forget:
The specialist makes more money than the gen-
eral practitioner. Be a specialist, not a general
practitioner.
MOVING AVERAGES
There are three main types of moving averages:
the simple moving average (SMA), the exponential
moving average (EMA), and the weighted moving
average (WMA). All three show the average price
of a security over a specific number of periods.
However, the formulas used to arrive at these
averages are different.
A simple moving average shows the average price
of a security over a specified number of periods. A
10-period moving average is the average price of
the last 10 periods. The period could be a day, a
week, a month, or just minutes. Connecting each
period’s SMA value gives you the moving average
line. The formula for simple moving average is as
follows:
SMA (N) =
where P = price of current period
P1 = price of 1 period before
P2 = price of 2 periods before
N = number of periods in the moving average
On most occasions, traders calculate the SMA
using the closing price, but there are also complex
strategies that calculate them from the high, the
low, or the open. This also goes for the EMA and
WMA. It depends on the trader. The trader also
has to choose the number of periods to be used,
which is covered later in this section.
An exponential moving average is calculated dif-
ferently than the simple moving average. It assigns
a greater weight to the data on the latest period.
P + P1 + P2 + P3 . . . + P(N − 1)���
N
14762_Chua_2p_c09.j.qxp 2/2/07 11:36 AM Page 153
Thus it responds faster to current events. The for-
mula for the EMA is as follows:
EMA (N) = (P × K) − (EMA1 × (1 − K))
where K = 2/(N + 1)
N = periods in the moving average
P = price of current period
EMA1 = EMA of 1 period before
To calculate this formula manually, do the fol-
lowing: Determine how many periods you want to
use for the EMA. Then calculate the value of the
coefficient K. Then calculate a SMA to use as EMA1
for the first EMA. Use the preceding formula to get
EMA (N). Repeat the last step to obtain the EMA
for the next period. Computers are available to do
all this dirty work. One press of a button and out
come the results.
A weighted moving average is also designed to put
more weight on recent data and less on past data. It
is calculated much like the simple moving average,
except that each period is multiplied by a weighting
factor. The weighting factor used depends on the
number of periods chosen. Suppose you want a
three-period WMA. Multiply the most current price
by 3, the price from the prior period by 2, and the
price from a couple of periods ago by 1. Add the
three together and divide by the sum of those peri-
ods. In this case, the sum would be 3 plus 2 plus 1,
or a total of 6.
A weighted moving average causes an even
greater reaction to the current price than the expo-
nential moving average. However, it tends to gen-
154 SAMMY CHUA’S DAY TRADE YOUR WAY TO FINANCIAL FREEDOM
erate false signals. I suggest that beginners stay
away from this moving average.
Choosing the Number of PeriodsThe number of periods to use depends on the
underlying sentiment you are trying to measure and
the trend you are trying to catch. A short time frame
gives you the average sentiment of that short time
frame. It changes direction more frequently than a
long time frame. A long time frame smoothes out
the noise, but reacts slowly to directional changes.
Long time frames are used when you want to catch
long-term trends. The more popular settings are 10-,
20-, 50-, 100-, and 200-period moving averages.
Uses of Moving AveragesMoving averages can be used to identify trends.
There are several ways to do this. The first is to
determine the slope of the moving average line. If
the slope is rising, the stock is on an uptrend. You
should go long. If the slope points downward, the
stock is on a downtrend. You should short the
stock (see Figure 9.1).
The second method involves finding the current
price location. If the stock price is above the mov-
ing average line, the trend is bullish. If it is below
the moving average line, it is bearish (see Figure
9.2). Based on this method, old mechanical sys-
tems would trade the security the following way:
Every time the price crosses from below the MA
line and closes above the MA line, it generates a
buy signal. Sell the stock if the price closes below
the MA line. A short signal is generated when the
stock crosses the MA line to close below it. Cover
14762_Chua_2p_c09.j.qxp 2/2/07 11:36 AM Page 154
SPOTTING TRENDS 155
9.1 Identifying Trends with Moving Averages
� THE SLOPE OF THE MOVING AVERAGE determines the trend of the stock. If theslope is up, then the trend is up. If the slope is down, then the trend is down.
9.2 Trading Signals from Moving Averages
� THIS CHART ILLUSTRATES the different buy and sell signals generated if youwere trading the crossovers.
14762_Chua_2p_c09.j.qxp 2/2/07 11:36 AM Page 155
the position only when the price closes above the
MA line. The number of periods to use depends on
the trend you are trying to catch. Longer trends
mean using longer periods.
One last note, shorter time periods will generate
more signals than longer periods, because they are
more sensitive to price movement. In a sideways
market, you get a little whiplash. Look at the
MSFT chart in Figure 9.2 for a three-month period.
It crossed back and forth over the MA line several
times during that period, making it tough for the
trader to follow.
The location of the short moving average line in
relation to the long moving average line is another
way to identify a trend. If the short-term moving
156 SAMMY CHUA’S DAY TRADE YOUR WAY TO FINANCIAL FREEDOM
average is above the long-term moving average,
the stock is said to be on an uptrend (see Figure 9.3).
If the short-term moving average is below the
long-term moving average, the stock is said to be
on a downtrend.
Moving averages also identify support and
resistance levels. If a stock price is above the mov-
ing average line, a pullback to this line could be a
chance to add to a long position. A break below the
moving average line could be a trigger to exit long
positions and go short. If the stock price is below the
moving average line, a bounce to this line could be
a chance to enter a short position or add to an exist-
ing position. A break above the line could serve as a
trigger to exit a short position and go long.
9.3 Identifying Trends with Moving Averages
� THIS IS ANOTHER METHOD whereby you can use moving averages to identifytrends. In our example, MSFT is considered to be on an uptrend when theshort-term (20-period) moving average is above the long-term (50-period)moving average. It is considered to be on a downtrend when the short-term(20-period) moving average is below the long-term (50-period) movingaverage.
14762_Chua_2p_c09.j.qxp 2/2/07 11:36 AM Page 156
SPOTTING TRENDS 157
SMA versus EMAEMA puts more weight on the most current period
than the SMA and gradually fades the last period
away. On the other hand, SMA assigns equal
weight to each period. In reality, current news and
sentiment should have the most weight. For the
purpose of day trading, exponential moving aver-
ages work best. Day traders are concerned with
short time frames. Recent news on a security is
important in short-term trading. An EMA does the
job, and SMA does not. I suggest that short-term
traders use the EMA instead of the SMA (see Fig-
ure 9.4).
Using the same periods we had on MSFT ear-
lier, I removed the candlestick patterns and left
only the EMA (20) and SMA (20). If you look at the
turning points on the chart in Figure 9.4, you will
notice that the EMA line (dashed line) almost
always turned before the SMA line (solid line)
turned. It did not matter whether the change in
direction was from up to down or from down to
up. The reaction was always faster and earlier.
For short-term traders, this slight edge is of
prime importance. The last thing I want is to be
stuck in a long position when the trend has already
started to change to the downside.
Advantages and DisadvantagesMoving averages smooth out the prices, filter out
the interperiod noise, and help identify the under-
lying trend. They are great trend-following indica-
tors. When the market is in a trend, whether an
9.4 EMA versus SMA
� ALTHOUGH THE EMA AND SMA LINES SHOWN HERE are both calculated basedon 20 periods, notice how the slope of the EMA always turns before the slopeof the SMA does. This tells us that the EMA reacts to current events a lotquicker than the SMA.
14762_Chua_2p_c09.j.qxp 2/2/07 11:36 AM Page 157
uptrend or a downtrend, moving averages help
the trader maximize gains. On an uptrend, a trader
should keep long positions while the stock stays
above the MA line. On a downtrend, a trader
should keep short positions while the stock stays
below the MA line. However, moving averages are
ineffective when the market is in a trading range.
They generate false signals and cause whipsaws.
Traders should be aware of market conditions
before using this indicator. In a sideways market, it
is best to leave this indicator alone. Another disad-
vantage of this indicator is the way signals are gen-
erated. MA traders receive signals only when
prices have crossed over to the other side of the
MA. The problem is that MA lines are always
drawn from historical data. For this reason, it is
considered a lagging indicator. It lacks the predic-
tive powers of the other indicators we have here.
MOVING AVERAGE CONVERGENCE DIVERGENCE
The moving average convergence divergence
(MACD) indicator is another trend-following indi-
cator. It was invented by Gerald Appel, a New
York analyst and money manager. It consists of
three exponential moving averages. To plot the
MACD indicator, you need to do the following:
Calculate a 12-period EMA of the closing prices.
Calculate a 26-period EMA of the closing prices
Subtract the 26-period EMA from the 12-period EMA.
Plot the difference as a solid line. This is called the
MACD line.
Calculate a 9-period EMA of the MACD line.
158 SAMMY CHUA’S DAY TRADE YOUR WAY TO FINANCIAL FREEDOM
Plot the result as a dashed line. This is called the
signal line.
The 12, 26, and 9 periods are the most widely used
numbers. Some traders like to optimize these
numbers by linking them to market cycles. MACD
provides three main signals: crossovers, over-
bought and oversold conditions, and divergences.
CrossoversMACD is plotted as two lines on a chart. One is a
solid line and the other a dashed line. The solid
line is the MACD line. It is also called the fast line.
The dashed line is the signal line. It is also called
the slow line. Trading signals are generated when
these lines cross each other.
A buy signal is generated when the MACD line
crosses over the signal line from below to close
above the signal line. When the MACD line crosses
the signal line to close below it, a sell signal is gen-
erated (see Figure 9.5).
Looking at the KLAC chart in Figure 9.5, we see
four trade signals generated by the MACD. The
first is a buy signal when the MACD line (solid)
crossed the signal line (dashed). Notice that the
MACD line was below the signal line before the
signal was generated. Only when it closes above
the line will the entry be triggered. While the
MACD line continues to stay above the signal line,
do not enter or exit a position. Simply continue to
hold the position. A sell order is triggered only
when the MACD line crosses the signal line and
closes below it. This indicates a sell-to-close or sell-
short-to-open position.
14762_Chua_2p_c09.j.qxp 2/2/07 11:36 AM Page 158
SPOTTING TRENDS 159
Notice that the MACD came down several times
but never crossed the signal line following the sec-
ond buy entry. No action should be taken. It finally
did break below the signal line on the fifth try. This
is the only time a sell order should be entered.
Overbought and Oversold ConditionsOverbought and oversold conditions are indica-
tions of extreme optimism and extreme pessimism
in the market. The market is like a big rubber band.
It can be stretched only so far. Sooner or later, it has
to snap back. The longer it’s stretched, the harder
the snapback will be. In an overbought condition,
buyers have been too aggressive. Soon, the momen-
tum will end and a sell-off will occur quickly. In an
oversold condition, sellers have been too aggres-
sive. Once the selling momentum ends, only buyers
are left. They will push the price up rapidly. To
determine whether an MACD indicates an over-
bought or oversold condition, watch the distance
between the MACD line and the signal line. If the
MACD line starts pulling away dramatically from
the signal line, it is possible that the security is
overextended. Prices could snap back soon.
DivergencesThe most powerful signal the MACD can generate
is a divergence. A bearish divergence occurs when
9.5 Moving Average Convergence Divergence
� A BUY SIGNAL IS GENERATED when the MACD line (solid line) crosses abovethe signal line (dashed line). A sell signal is given when the MACD line crossesbelow the signal line. Look at how MACD signals help catch a major part of thetrends on KLAC.
14762_Chua_2p_c09.j.qxp 2/2/07 11:36 AM Page 159
the indicator fails to confirm that a new high has
been established. This means that while the price
has hit a new high, MACD stayed at the same levels
or lower than the previous high. A bullish diver-
gence occurs when a new low is established and the
indicator fails to confirm the move with a new low.
Let’s analyze the KLAC chart to see whether a
bearish divergence has occurred. Pay no attention
to the crossover trade signals that it is generating.
Simply look at the three price peaks I have circled
in Figure 9.6. Each of these peaks has a correspon-
ding MACD reading. To find out what the read-
ings are, follow the long line down to the bottom of
the chart.
160 SAMMY CHUA’S DAY TRADE YOUR WAY TO FINANCIAL FREEDOM
Between point A and point B, you will notice the
following: Point B is a new high price. MACD at
point B is also higher than it was at point A.
MACD has confirmed this price move. It is vali-
dating a new peak in price. Chances are the price
will move higher again in the future.
Between point B and point C, things are differ-
ent. Point C is a new high in price. However,
MACD has not established another high. It has
now fallen below the MACD high set at point B.
This is when a divergence is said to have occurred.
As you can see in Figure 9.6, the signal foretold
the big decline that ensued the next month. The
stock dropped from around $95 to below $50.
9.6 MACD Divergences
� THE CHART OF KLAC HERE SHOWS that, although prices broke to a new highbetween points B and C, MACD failed to confirm to move with a new high. Abearish divergence signal was triggered as soon as the slope of the MACDturned down.
14762_Chua_2p_c09.j.qxp 2/2/07 11:36 AM Page 160
SPOTTING TRENDS 161
MACD HISTOGRAM
The MACD indicator can also be plotted into a his-
togram. The MACD histogram measures the dif-
ference between the MACD line and the signal
line. To calculate this difference, subtract the value
of the signal line from the value of the MACD line.
The MACD histogram is plotted into vertical
bars. They are much like volume bars, except there
is a zero line in the middle. If the MACD line is
above the signal line, the result is positive and a
vertical bar would appear above the zero line. If
the MACD line is below the signal line, the result
would be negative and a vertical bar would then
appear below the zero line.
Two trading signals are generated when using
the histogram. The first is generated when the
slope of the histogram changes direction. The sec-
ond, an extremely strong signal, occurs when there
is a price divergence with the MACD histogram.
Slope Direction ChangeThe most important part of the MACD histogram
is the slope. If the slope is up, then consider long
positions. If the slope is down, consider short posi-
tions. Trading signals are generated when the fol-
lowing conditions apply: For buy signals, the
MACD histogram has to be below the zero line. A
trading signal is generated once the slope of the
histogram changes. Once a position is entered, a
stop-loss order should be placed just slightly
below the last support.
For sell signals, the MACD histogram has to be
above the zero line. A trading signal is generated
when the slope turns downward. Once a short
position is opened, place a stop-loss order just
slightly above the last high.
The chart of E-mini Nasdaq 100 futures in Fig-
ure 9.7 shows how trading signals are generated.
While the slope of the MACD remains positive or
neutral, long positions should be kept. Exit only
when the slope turns negative. This is also the
point where a short position can be entered. In the
case of short, stay in the position until the slope
turns positive. Observe the stop-loss point if it is
violated. Exit the position and reevaluate.
Point A is the only point at which you would
not hold any contracts of the E-mini Nasdaq 100
futures. The long position was stopped out. A
word of warning: These signals tend to occur fre-
quently. They are for traders with a high tolerance
for loss. Try to get in at the beginning of a trend
and ride it for as long as possible. Traders who fol-
low this method will find themselves stopped out
several times until they finally catch a big run. The
big runs usually pay for the losses. Unfortunately,
there are times when the market does not have a
strong trend and losses are substantial. A better
way is to use different time frames. A long-term
trader should use a weekly MACD chart. A short-
term trader can use the daily charts for intraday
trade signals. Never use the same period as the one
you are trading. Back away and look at the bigger
picture.
DivergencesMACD histograms also generate divergence sig-
nals. This signal does not occur often, but it is a
14762_Chua_2p_c09.j.qxp 2/2/07 11:36 AM Page 161
strong trading signal. Divergences tell us that the
bulls are losing momentum in an uptrend. The
stock is due for a reversal. On a downtrend, diver-
gences also suggest that sellers are losing momen-
tum. They are getting weaker. A possible reversal
could be in the works. Bullish divergences occur
when the MACD histogram fails to confirm a new
low in price, and bearish divergences occur when
the histogram fails to confirm a new high in price.
Let’s take a look at the chart of BRCM in Figure
9.8 and discuss the divergence trade signals. Pay
attention to the slope change for signs of trend
direction change.
162 SAMMY CHUA’S DAY TRADE YOUR WAY TO FINANCIAL FREEDOM
Two bullish divergence signals were generated.
The first occurred between point A and point B.
Point B established a new low for BRCM. The
MACD histogram failed to confirm this signal.
This set up an entry point when the slope
turned upward. The stop-loss point should be
placed just slightly below the low of point B. After
a small rally, sellers again stepped in and forced
the price down. The stop-loss point was hit and the
trade was closed for a loss. The sell-off ended at
point C, and another bullish divergence signal was
triggered. Point C was a new low in price, but the
histogram failed to confirm it.
9.7 MACD Histogram
� BUY AND SELL SIGNALS ARE GIVEN on this indicator when the direction of theslope changes. When the slope of the MACD histogram turns up, it generates abuy signal. A sell signal is given when the slope of the MACD histogram turnsdown.
14762_Chua_2p_c09.j.qxp 2/2/07 11:36 AM Page 162
SPOTTING TRENDS 163
The strongest bullish signals are those in which
point C is higher than both points B and A. These
double divergence formations are rare and are
among the most powerful signals you will ever get
with indicators. It shows that the bears have com-
pletely lost momentum. They present a fantastic
long opportunity. When these double divergences
are found on the bearish end, do not hesitate to go
long. The second long entry on BRCM (see Figure
9.8) proved to be profitable. The stock ran from $35
to $44. This more than covered the small loss sus-
tained on the first trade.
STOCHASTIC OSCILLATOR
George Lane popularized the use of the stochastic
oscillator as a technical indicator. It compares the
relationship between the closing price and its price
range over a given period of time. The stochastic
oscillator consists of two lines: the fast line, called
%K, and the slow line, called %D.
The formula for %K is as follows:
%K = � � × 100
where C = close of today
C − L(N)��H(N) − L(N)
9.8 MACD Histogram Divergences
� DIVERGENCES BETWEEN THE MACD HISTOGRAM AND THE PRICES can identifymajor trend reversals. As prices on BRCM declined to new lows between pointsA to B and B to C, this indicator makes a slightly higher low each time. This isa bullish divergence signal. BRCM made a very powerful move once the slopeon the MACD histogram turned up (which was your buy entry signal).
14762_Chua_2p_c09.j.qxp 2/2/07 11:36 AM Page 163
L(N) = lowest point within the number of periods
selected
H(N) = highest point within the number of periods
selected
The %D is obtained by calculating a moving
average of %K. The number of periods for this
moving average usually differs from the number
of periods used for %K. The standard number of
periods for %K is five, with a smoothing period of
three. I have also seen a 5/3, a 10/3, and a 14/8
combination used successfully. A shorter %K
period catches more turning points, while a longer
%K period (14 to 21) will help identify significant
turning points.
It is impossible to get a negative number as a
result. Since it is calculated as a percentage of the
periods’ high and low range, the result would
fluctuate between 0 and 100. A reading of 100 per-
cent indicates that the price closed at its highest
level within the selected number of periods. A
reading of 0 percent tells us that the price closed
at its lowest level within the selected number of
periods.
On the chart, the %K is plotted on a solid line
and the %D is plotted on a dashed line. Reference
lines are drawn at the 20 percent and 80 percent
levels. When stochastic reaches the 80 percent
level, the market is considered overbought. When
it goes below the 20 percent level, the market is
considered oversold.
Stochastic oscillators generate three popular
trading signals: overbought and oversold levels,
crossovers, and divergence.
164 SAMMY CHUA’S DAY TRADE YOUR WAY TO FINANCIAL FREEDOM
Overbought and Oversold LevelsThe first signal is based on the overbought and
oversold levels at 20 percent and 80 percent. A buy
signal is generated when the stochastic oscillator
(either %K or %D) falls below the 20 percent level
and then rises above that level. A sell signal is gen-
erated when the stochastic oscillator (either %K or
%D) rises above the 80 percent level and later falls
below it.
The chart of BRCD in Figure 9.9 shows the buy
and sell signals generated using the first method.
Protective stops on a long position should be
placed just under the most recent low, while a pro-
tective stop on a short position should be placed
just above the most recent high. For long positions,
tighten stops on the position once it gets close to
the overbought level. For shorts, tighten stops on
the position once it gets close to the oversold level.
Notice that BRCD (see Figure 9.9) started to form a
downtrend toward the end. Buy 4 would have
been stopped out for a loss. Stochastic oscillators
work well in a sideways market, but they generate
a lot of false signals when the market is in a trend.
CrossoversThe second trading signal generated by the sto-
chastic oscillator is the crossover. A long entry is
generated when the %K line rises above the %D
line, and a short is generated when the %K line
drops below the %D line. In this case, you would
also use a crossover as an exit signal. Most traders
are always in a position. They cover their short
positions and go long, and later they sell the long
and go short at the same time. During a sideways
14762_Chua_2p_c09.j.qxp 2/2/07 11:36 AM Page 164
SPOTTING TRENDS 165
market, this strategy can produce good profits for
traders.
The chart of QLGC in Figure 9.10 makes the
idea a little clearer. In this method, the stochastic
trader would always be in a position. Every buy
marks a point where the trader is covering a short
position and reversing it to go long. Every sell
marks the point where the trader sells to close the
long position and also sells to open a short posi-
tion. In this case, the only time the trader takes a
loss is when the trend continues down on the sec-
ond to the last buy signal.
DivergenceDivergence signals in stochastic oscillators are also
powerful signals. A bullish divergence occurs when
prices establish a new low but stochastic fails to
follow suit. A strong buy signal is given as soon as
stochastic turns up from its second bottom. The
best buy signals are those in which the first bottom
is below the 20 percent reference line and the sec-
ond is above it.
A bearish divergence occurs when the price estab-
lishes a new high but stochastic manages to stay
below the previous high. A strong sell or short sig-
9.9 Stochastic Overbought and Oversold Trade Signals
� STOCHASTIC BUY SIGNALS ARE GENERATED when this indicator falls below the20 percent level and then rises above it again. A sell signal is given when thisindicator rises above the 80 percent level and then falls below it again. Thechart here shows you all the different signals that would have been generatedon BRCD using this indicator.
14762_Chua_2p_c09.j.qxp 2/2/07 11:36 AM Page 165
nal is generated as soon as stochastic turns down
from the second top. The best signals are those in
which the first top is above the 80 percent refer-
ence line and the second top is below it.
Agoodexampleofabearishstochasticdivergence
is ITWO, shown in Figure 9.11. The price at point B
managed to break to a new high, a bullish sign. How-
ever, when compared with point A, stochastic tells a
different story. It refutes the move and is unable to go
along with the new high. Stochastic declined
between period A and period B. The uptrend was in
jeopardy. The reverse followed almost immediately,
and prices later dropped severely.
166 SAMMY CHUA’S DAY TRADE YOUR WAY TO FINANCIAL FREEDOM
RELATIVE STRENGTH INDEX
Welles Wilder introduced the relative strength
index in 1978. It is an oscillator that measures the
strength of a stock by tracking changes in its clos-
ing price. It is a good leading indicator. It never
lags behind. This is one of the reasons its popular-
ity has grown. The formula for RSI is as follows:
RSI = 100 − � �where U = average of upward price change in the selected
period
100�1 + ��
DU
��
9.10 Stochastic Crossover Trade Signals
� BUY AND SELL SIGNALS ARE ALSO GENERATED when the two lines cross. Lookto take a long position when the %K line (solid line) rises above the %D line(dashed line). Take a short position when the %K line falls below the %D line.The chart of QLGC shows all the signals that would have been generated if youwere trading the crossovers.
14762_Chua_2p_c09.j.qxp 2/2/07 11:36 AM Page 166
SPOTTING TRENDS 167
D = average of downward price change in the
selected period
Six steps need to be taken to calculate this oscil-
lator:
●1 Separate the days with a closing price higher than the
previous period and the days with a closing price lower
than the previous period.
●2 Figure the upward price change for each closing price
that went higher by subtracting the closing price from the
preceding closing price within the selected period.
●3 Calculate the average upward price change by adding
all upward price changes within the period and dividing
the result by the selected number of periods.
●4 Figure the downward price change for each closing
price that went lower by subtracting the preceding closing
price from the closing price within the selected period.
●5 Calculate the average downward price change by
adding the downward price change within the period and
dividing it by the selected number of periods.
●6 Finally, calculate the RSI by plugging in the values
obtained in steps 3 and 5.
Isn’t it great that we have computers to do all that
calculating for us?
The results are then plotted in a separate study.
RSI results will fall between 0 and 100. Like the sto-
chastic oscillator, reference lines are also drawn to
9.11 Stochastic Divergences
� THE MOST POWERFUL SIGNAL THIS INDICATOR CAN GENERATE is thedivergence signal. This chart shows a bearish divergence on ITWO. Althoughprices rose to a new high, the stochastic line failed to confirm the move.Instead, this indicator established a lower high.
14762_Chua_2p_c09.j.qxp 2/2/07 11:36 AM Page 167
indicate overbought and oversold conditions. For
RSI, they are often drawn at the 30 and 70 levels.
Some traders change these levels according to
market conditions. For bear markets, they use a 20
and 60 level. For bull markets, they draw the lines
at the 40 and 80 levels. When you vary the levels of
your reference lines, make sure that RSI has spent
less than 5 percent of the time at those levels for
the past 80 to 100 periods. Otherwise, you need to
redraw them to better fit the conditions.
When Wilder introduced this oscillator, he rec-
ommended using a 14-period RSI. The 9- and 25-
period RSIs have since gained a wide following.
The lowest period I recommend on RSI is seven.
You should experiment with different periods to
find out which works best for you. Keep in mind
that the lower the number, the more volatile the
indicator tends to be. Volatile indicators generate
more trading signals than less volatile ones. For
short-term traders, volatile is better, because they
catch short runs. Long-term traders should work
with a higher number of periods.
In his book, New Concepts in Technical Trading
Systems, Wilder discusses five uses for the RSI.
However, the most common uses are for over-
bought and oversold conditions, chart patterns,
and divergences.
RSI LevelsThe relative strength index usually turns around
when it goes above the upper reference line at 70
percent. It also bottoms below the lower reference
line at 30 percent. Buy signals are generated when
RSI declines below the lower reference line and
168 SAMMY CHUA’S DAY TRADE YOUR WAY TO FINANCIAL FREEDOM
then rises above it. Sell signals are generated when
RSI goes above the upper reference line and then
crosses back below it (see Figure 9.12).
The chart in Figure 9.12 shows the buy and sell
signals generated if you were trading HPQ using
RSI levels. Stop-loss points on these trades should
be at the most recent low for a long position and
the most recent high for a short position. In the
case of HPQ, the second sell signal would have
resulted in a loss when the price surged upward.
After exiting the position, sit on the sidelines and
reevaluate the opportunity before reentering. The
third sell signal proved to be profitable after RSI
declined below the reference line again.
This method of entering into a long and short
position is best combined with the trend of the big-
ger picture. If you first check the trend on the
weekly chart, entering on an RSI-level trigger usu-
ally produces better results. For intraday trading,
make sure the direction of your RSI trade coincides
with the trend on the daily chart.
Just to be clear on this issue, if the stock is on an
uptrend on the daily chart (bigger picture), the only
trade I would take based on the RSI level intraday
is a long. In order for it to trigger an entry, intraday
price has to meet the preceding conditions. On the
other hand, if the stock is on a downtrend on the
daily chart, the only trade I would take based on
RSI level intraday is a short. Again, RSI level condi-
tions also have to be met before I would trade.
Chart PatternsClassical technical analysis works better with the
relative strength index than with any other indica-
14762_Chua_2p_c09.j.qxp 2/2/07 11:36 AM Page 168
SPOTTING TRENDS 169
tor. Trendlines, supports and resistance, triangles,
and head and shoulders patterns will all work
with RSI.
The RSI will often complete patterns or a trend-
line break before the charts. If you see an ascend-
ing triangle breakout on RSI, chances are the price
of the stock will also break out to new highs. This
prepares you for the upcoming move.
Another example would be a trendline break.
When RSI breaks an uptrend line, get ready to go
short when the uptrend line of the stock is broken.
DivergencesDivergences between RSI and prices also give the
best signals for this indicator. A bullish divergence
occurs when a new low price is established and the
RSI indicator fails to confirm the move with a new
low. The best bullish RSI divergence setup is when
the first RSI bottom is below the lower reference
line and the shallower second RSI bottom is above
the lower reference line. When a bullish diver-
gence occurs, enter long as soon as RSI turns up
from the second bottom. Place a stop-loss order
9.12 Relative Strength Index
� RSI BUY AND SELL SIGNALS ARE GENERATED much like stochastic signals. Theonly difference is that RSI uses the 30 percent and 70 percent levels. Whenthis indicator rises above the 70 percent level and falls back below it, a sellsignal is generated. When this indicator falls below the 30 percent level andrises back above it, a buy signal is given. The chart of HPQ shows the differentRSI buy and sell signals that would have been generated.
14762_Chua_2p_c09.j.qxp 2/2/07 11:36 AM Page 169
slightly below the latest low. Trail to exit the posi-
tion to maximize profits.
A bearish divergence occurs when the price
makes a new high but the RSI indicator makes a
lower top. This signal is strongest when the first
RSI top is above the 70 percent reference line. On a
bearish divergence, sell short as soon as RSI heads
downward from the second top. Place a stop-loss
order slightly above the latest high. As always,
trail to exit this position to maximize profits.
The chart of AMZN in Figure 9.13 shows an RSI
setting of nine. It is showing a bearish divergence.
The price hit a new peak at point B, but the RSI
170 SAMMY CHUA’S DAY TRADE YOUR WAY TO FINANCIAL FREEDOM
made a lower top. A sell-short signal was gener-
ated when RSI turned down below the 70 percent
level. A stop-loss order should be placed above the
peak at point B. The stock turned around from
there and headed south more than 40 points.
ON-BALANCE VOLUME
Joseph Granville developed this indicator. It was
originally presented in his book, New Strategy of
Daily Stock Market Timing for Maximum Profits. On-
balance volume (OBV) is a leading indicator that
relates volume to price change. It keeps a running
9.13 RSI Divergences
� THE CHART OF AMZN SHOWS A BEARISH DIVERGENCE between points A and B.Prices rose to a new high between points A and B. On the other hand, RSImade a lower high. It was not able to confirm the breakout. A short positiontaken once this indicator turned would have profited handsomely.
14762_Chua_2p_c09.j.qxp 2/2/07 11:36 AM Page 170
SPOTTING TRENDS 171
total of volume, rising and falling depending on
the changes in the closing price. If the price closed
higher than the previous period, volume for the
period is added to OBV. If the price closed lower
than the previous period, volume is subtracted
from OBV. If the price closed the same as the previ-
ous period, then OBV stays the same. The most
basic assumption regarding OBV analysis is that
OBV moves before the price. That is why it is con-
sidered a leading indicator.
The OBV movement gives us an idea of what
the large institutions are doing. If it is rising,
money is flowing into this security. If it is falling,
chances are the institutions are cashing out of this
security.
One of the trading signals OBV generates is
based on this condition. A buy signal is generated
if OBV breaks out and reaches a new high. The
breakout confirms the buying strength and indi-
cates that prices are likely to go higher. On the
other hand, a sell signal is generated if OBV breaks
down and reaches a new low. The breakdown con-
firms that sellers are in control of the market and
prices are likely to decline further.
The OBV gives a second trading signal when it
diverges from prices. If the price rallies to a new
high, but OBV does not, then a bearish divergence
signal is triggered. You should sell to close long
positions or sell to open a short position. An OBV
bullish divergence occurs when the price hits a
new low while OBV establishes a higher bottom.
This generates a strong buying signal.
The IDTI chart in Figure 9.14 shows an OBV
bullish divergence. In the early part of July, the
price broke slightly lower than the low established
in the middle of June. However, OBV failed to con-
firm the move. If you compare the OBV level
between the two lows at point A and point B, you
will notice that OBV was higher at point B. To con-
firm the price breakdown, OBV should be lower at
point B than at point A. In this case, it was not. A
bullish divergence is said to have occurred.
The trade would be to go long once OBV turned
up. Place a protective stop just slightly below the
low of point B. Entry on this trade would be some-
where around $28. The stock ran all the way past
$40, for a nice gain of over $12.
ACCUMULATION/DISTRIBUTION
This leading indicator, called accumulation/distri-
bution (A/D) was developed by Larry Williams in
1972. He described it in his book, How I Made a Mil-
lion Dollars. Like OBV, this indicator also incorpo-
rates volume into its analysis. However, instead of
just tracking volume’s relationship to changes in
closing prices, this indicator also tracks volume’s
relationship to the high-low range.
The A/D line is calculated by adding and sub-
tracting part of each period’s volume from a
cumulative total. The amount of volume added or
subtracted depends on the relationship between
the close and the high-low range. More volume
would be added to the cumulative total if the secu-
rity closed at or near its high.
Conversely, if the security were to close near its
low, a lot more volume will be subtracted from the
cumulative total. If the closing price was exactly in
14762_Chua_2p_c09.j.qxp 2/2/07 11:36 AM Page 171
the middle of the period’s range, then nothing is
added to the cumulative total.
The formula for A/D is as follows:
A/D = × V
where C = closing price
L = lowest price
H = highest price
V = volume
Interpretation of the A/D line is basically the
same as OBV. The A/D line should be leading an
(C − L) − (H − C)��
(H − L)
172 SAMMY CHUA’S DAY TRADE YOUR WAY TO FINANCIAL FREEDOM
uptrend while the market is strong. The A/D line
should also be leading the downtrend in a weak
market. This is because of institutional money
going in and out of the security.
Trading signals are generated in the same two
ways as OBV. First, trading signals occur when
there is a break of previous support and resis-
tance levels on the A/D line. A break out of the
A/D line to a new high is a signal that higher
prices are coming. Go long as soon as price action
confirms the signal. A breakdown of the A/D line
to a new low is a signal that prices will be declin-
9.14 On-Balance Volume Divergences
� BULLISH OR BEARISH DIVERGENCES on this indicator rarely occur, so they arevery powerful signals. This chart of IDTI shows a bullish divergence signalbetween points A and B. Notice how the OBV indicator failed to confirm thebreakdown in price. Sellers did not have any power at all to move the pricesdown. Prices turned up and the trend reversed.
14762_Chua_2p_c09.j.qxp 2/2/07 11:36 AM Page 172
SPOTTING TRENDS 173
ing soon. Go short as soon as price action con-
firms the signal.
Second, a stronger signal occurs when the A/D
line diverges from prices. A bearish divergence
occurs when a new high in price is not confirmed
by a new high on the A/D line, and a bullish diver-
gence occurs when a new low in price fails to see a
new low on the A/D line. Bullish divergence gives
strong buy signals while bearish divergence gives
a strong sell signal.
FUTURES AND PIVOT POINTS
The candlestick chart in Figure 9.15 shows a lot of
information: stochastic %D, volume, MACD his-
togram, and three moving averages. All of these
have been discussed previously. What is new is
that pivot point lines have been added. The E-mini
futures are very useful in spotting trends. Remem-
ber, both the Nasdaq and S&P futures contracts are
based on the Nasdaq 100 and the S&P 500 Indices.
The old saying “A rising tide lifts all boats” (and
vice versa) is very true. If, for example, you are in
a long trade and futures are trending upward, it’s
like having the wind at your back: The odds will
be increased in your favor. Futures will tend to
lead the market, so watching them closely will
help your trading.
Adding pivot points adds one more piece to
puzzle. As you can see in the chart in Figure 9.15
showing S&P E-minis, the market hit resistance
and support right on the S1 line and also on the PP
line. The calculation of pivot points is fairly sim-
ple. Most of the better trading platforms include
them in their technical studies that you can add to
your charts. If not, a simple spreadsheet can be set
up to do the calculation for you, and you can then
draw the lines manually on most charting pack-
ages. Pivot points are based on the prior day’s
high, low, and close. These values suggest where
the futures will pivot up or down and hit levels of
support or resistance. You can also apply them to
individual stocks, but they work best on futures
contracts.
To calculate the pivot point support and resist-
ance levels, you need yesterday’s high, low, and
close. The pivot point is simply the average of the
high plus low plus close, or (H + L + C) ÷ 3. Sup-
port level 1 is calculated by multiplying the pivot
by 2 and then subtracting the day’s high. Resis-
tance level 1 is calculated by multiplying the
pivot by 2 and then subtracting the day’s low.
Finally, the secondary support (S2) and resistance
(R2) levels are calculated by using the numbers (P,
S1, and R1) created in step one. This is how they
are calculated:
Pivot (P) =
where Resistance level 1 = (2 × P) − L
Support level 1 (S1) = (2 × P) − H
Resistance level 2 (R2) = (P − S1) + R1
Support level 2 (S2) = P − (R1 − S1)
Once you have made these calculations, it is
best to plot them on your intraday futures chart.
These lines will often alert you to areas where the
market is likely to turn. There are three ways you
H + L + C�
3
14762_Chua_2p_c09.j.qxp 2/2/07 11:36 AM Page 173
can take advantage of this information. First, let’s
suppose you are in a trade that is on the same
direction as the market. As the market gets close to
a pivot point, my suggestion is to watch your posi-
tion a little closer. Should the market reverse at the
pivot point, you might want to tighten your stop a
bit or even choose to take some profits on the posi-
174 SAMMY CHUA’S DAY TRADE YOUR WAY TO FINANCIAL FREEDOM
tion. The reason is because as the market turns and
goes against your trade, it is very likely that your
position will also move against you. Second, let’s
suppose you are looking to get into a position. If
the market is nearing a pivot point and the direc-
tion it traveled before is the same as the direction
of your trade, my suggestion is to hold off on the
9.15 Futures with Pivot Points
� THE E-MINI FUTURES WITH PIVOT POINTS are a valuable tool for determining trend and support and resistance.
14762_Chua_2p_c09.j.qxp 2/2/07 11:36 AM Page 174
SPOTTING TRENDS 175
entry. It is better to wait until the pivot point is bro-
ken before entering the position. Third, if the mar-
ket is nearing a pivot point and the direction it
traveled before is opposite the direction of your
trade, my suggestion is to get in immediately on
the trade once you see prices on the futures bounce
off the pivot point. The reverse would put your
trade in the same direction as the market and
should help your trade.
CONCLUSION
Trend-following indicators work well when the
market is in a trend, and oscillators work better
when the market is in a trading range. Make sure
you know what the current market conditions are
before using an indicator to trade.
For the purpose of short-term trading, it is not
necessary to learn the whole encyclopedia of
trading indicators. The most basic technical
analysis tools, the most basic charting methods,
and the most commonly used technical indicators
are all you need to succeed. It is more important
to learn how to use each of these tools properly
than to learn more tools. Mastering the basic tech-
niques will give you the edge you want. The rest
depends on your discipline and dedication. Trade
only when you have developed a solid plan. ●$
14762_Chua_2p_c09.j.qxp 2/2/07 11:36 AM Page 175
14762_Chua_2p_c09.j.qxp 2/2/07 11:36 AM Page 176
CHAPTER 10
Preparing forthe Open
• The Trading Day
• Do the Research
• Manage Risk
• Set Alerts and Trading Screens
• Intraday Trading
• Market Indices
• Other Market Indicators
• Direction of Market Trends
• Keep a Trade Journal
14762_Chua_2p_c10.j.qxp 2/2/07 11:37 AM Page 177
Be prepared. The first step is to be prepared. This
means following methodology and risk manage-
ment disciplines. Never step into day trading if
you are not prepared.
Here is the step-by-step preparation process
that I go through.
DO THE RESEARCH
What you need to research depends on the
methodology you choose. In Chapter 9, I outlined
several good trading signals and opportunities.
Each and every day I rank the stocks on my watch
list according to the type, strength, and number of
signals they have generated. Each signal is
assigned a value depending on the strength of
those signals. Stocks that are mildly bullish will
have a value of +1. They show a breakout of a
resistance, an uptrend above the 20-day moving
average, and an RSI crossover above the lower ref-
erence line. The more powerful signals are
assigned bigger values. All bullish divergences
will have a value of +5.
Bearish stocks will have negative values rang-
178 SAMMY CHUA’S DAY TRADE YOUR WAY TO FINANCIAL FREEDOM
ing from −1 to −5. Bearish divergences rank the
highest while bearish reading generated by basic
technical analysis would have a value of just −1.
After assigning these values, I add everything
together. I find that the more negative the number,
the more bearish the stock will be. I also find the
stock to be more bullish if the number is more pos-
itive. For example, a stock on an uptrend (+1) that
is breaking out of resistance (+1) will have a value
of +2. It will rank higher than a stock that is just on
an uptrend and that has a value of +1. A stock on a
downtrend (−1) will not be as negative as a stock
on a downtrend (−1) that is breaking a support
level (−1). This is because the second stock has a
total value of −2. The best trading candidates are
those at the two extremes, the most bullish and the
most bearish. I recommend following just a few
until you are comfortable handling more. I have
followed as many as 40 stocks on a given day, 20 of
the most bullish and 20 of the most bearish.
Here are a few things to watch out for when you
are assigning values. Do not follow two indicators
of the same type. They tend to give the same signals
and skew the results according to their advantages.
THE TRADING DAY
GETTING READY FOR EACH TRADING DAY is invaluable for
the successful day trader. Investing your time in a number of
basic procedures that I discuss in this chapter will improve your
chances to persevere and succeed each trading day.
14762_Chua_2p_c10.j.qxp 2/2/07 11:37 AM Page 178
PREPARING FOR THE OPEN 179
When using the oscillator and volume indicators,
follow just one indicator. This goes for trend-
following indicators, too. Do not forget that some of
these indicators can generate more than one trading
signal. When both signals are triggered, both of
their values have to be added to the running total
for the stock. Finally, the values you place on each of
these bullish and bearish signals should be adjusted
based on your trading experience. If you have had
successes with breaks of support and resistance lev-
els, assign a higher positive and negative value to
these indicators so they come to the top of your list
more often. It makes sense to trade the combina-
tions that have made money for you in the past.
MANAGE RISK
The next step is to work on risk management. To
use risk management effectively, you must know
at what price point you will consider entering into
a position. One of the most common entry points
for short-term traders is a break of the previous
day’s high or the previous day’s low. A break of
the previous day’s high triggers a signal to go
long. A break of the previous day’s low triggers a
signal to go short. This is because the high and low
of the previous day were the resistance and sup-
port levels that day.
Other entry points are those called for on the
chart patterns you found—such as breakout or
breakdown prices on a rectangle formation. The
choice should be based on the methodology or sys-
tem that generated the trading signals.
Whatever your entry points are, you need to
note them on your trading candidate list. Then fig-
ure the stop-loss point for each of these candidates.
Again, their location depends on the methodology
that generated the signal. A bearish divergence sig-
Account size: $50,000Percentage risk: 2%Risk per trade: $1,000
Long Entry S/L Shares Short Entry S/L Shares
ABGX 27.94 24.88 327 HGSI 31.66 35.11 145
BRCD 19.65 17.78 535 IDPH 48.48 50.61 235
BRCM 26.86 24.40 407 IDTI 23.11 24.97 269
CIEN 12.75 11.14 621 JDSU 6.50 7.52 490
CKFR 20.76 17.66 323 MERQE 25.52 27.39 267
TABLE 10.1 Sample Risk Management Table
14762_Chua_2p_c10.j.qxp 2/2/07 11:37 AM Page 179
nal usually has a stop above the latest minor high.
A rectangle would have the stop placed slightly on
the inside of the rectangle. Each of the methods we
described in the earlier chapter has its own stop-
loss point. It is important that you follow them.
They have already been time-tested, so you do not
have to reinvent the wheel. Next, calculate the
appropriate number of shares to take in the posi-
tion. Divide the risk per trade by the per-share
stop-loss amount to arrive at the number of shares
to trade for each candidate. You end up with some-
thing similar to Table 10.1, which should be pre-
pared before the market opens. Mark your long
candidates on one side of the sheet and the short
candidates on the other side. Then list the number
of shares you want to trade. When the entry signal
is triggered intraday, all that is left is to get the
order executed.
SET ALERTS AND TRADING SCREENS
After the preceding steps, set your alerts and
trading screens. It will be obvious after a few
days that you do not trade the same stocks all the
time. When you trade with a ranking system, the
candidates will rotate from day to day. Today,
QCOM might be one of the strongest candidates,
and the next day it may not be. The trading
screen on your computer must be changed man-
ually as new trading candidates emerge. Do this
before the market opens. Now set your alerts.
Most real-time trading software programs come
with alert functions. Some platforms offer only
very basic functions; others offer very elaborate
180 SAMMY CHUA’S DAY TRADE YOUR WAY TO FINANCIAL FREEDOM
systems. This is an area you want to research
when picking a trading platform, because it
becomes an important part of most trading sys-
tems. An alert is a software function that will at a
minimum alert you when a price has been hit.
The better platforms take this function much fur-
ther. Some will alert you, place orders, cancel
orders, load stocks in the order entry window,
and more. Figure 10.1A shows you an example
of the alert entry window on CyberTrader Pro.
After alerts are entered you need a way to keep
track of them and modify them. Figure 10.1B
shows the Alert tab in CyberTrader that lists all
of the active and inactive alerts. Placing an alert
on all candidates helps you in a number of ways.
It is impossible to follow all candidates all the
time. Loading all the trade candidates into a
Market View window (see Figure 10.2) will
reduce your workload by allowing you to organ-
ize them and check the status of the alert (high
and low) for the day, change from open and
close, review the 52-week high, switch industry
sectors, and so on.
Traders who continually miss opportunities
have a tendency to force their trades. They get into
trades late, or, fearful of missing the next opportu-
nity, they get into a trade early, before a confirma-
tion has been generated. When your entry is late,
the risk is higher because the stop-loss point is fur-
ther away. Both cases will lead to poor results.
Another tendency is to try to make the late entry
work by holding it. This means you let your losers
run. This fear of missing opportunities does not
breed confidence. It is a never-ending cycle that
14762_Chua_2p_c10.j.qxp 2/2/07 11:37 AM Page 180
PREPARING FOR THE OPEN 181
10.1 Alert Entry Window
� THE ADD ALERT WINDOW, where an alert forBIDU is being set, and the Alert tab in theAccount Manager, where all the alerts arelisted and can be edited, removed, activated,or deactivated.
14762_Chua_2p_c10.j.qxp 2/2/07 11:37 AM Page 181
can easily be broken by simply setting alerts. It
does not take a lot of effort or time, and the results
can be dramatic.
Placing an alert also frees the trader to do other
things. Many professional traders take on multiple
positions. If their attention is devoted to catching
182 SAMMY CHUA’S DAY TRADE YOUR WAY TO FINANCIAL FREEDOM
trade entries, what will become of their open posi-
tions?
A large part of trading involves trade manage-
ment. After getting into a trade, your first concern
is to control losses. You need to place an order to
exit at the stop-loss point. If the trade goes your
10.2 The Market View
� HERE IS THE PLACE to keep track of all trading candidates.
14762_Chua_2p_c10.j.qxp 2/2/07 11:37 AM Page 182
PREPARING FOR THE OPEN 183
way, you still have to manage your trade. You need
to take steps to protect profits. You need to watch
the market. You need to watch the stock. You need
to move your trailing stops. There is always some-
thing to do, especially if you carry multiple posi-
tions. Don’t forget that you can set an alert for
stop-loss orders, or on some platforms just go
ahead and place the order where it is held on the
server. A little extra safety just in case you have
Internet connection problems or computer break-
downs.
INTRADAY TRADING
Ding! Ding! Ding! The market is now open for
business! What do you do next?
The first step is to watch the market indices. A
market index is a moving average of a group of
stocks, either within a specific sector or encompass-
ing all sectors. The market index acts as a barome-
ter for either a specific sector or the entire market.
The most well-known indices are the Dow Jones
Industrial 30, the Nasdaq Composite, the NYSE
Composite, the S&P 100, and the Nasdaq 100.
There are two types of market indices—cash
and futures. The cash indices are a compilation of
the data gathered from all the stocks in the index.
For example, the cash index of the Dow Jones 30 is
based on the stock prices of those 30 underlying
stocks. But the index changes only after the stock
prices have already changed. That is why they are
called lagging indicators. The results are always
after the fact, although today some brokerages,
CyberTrader being one, have their own “ticker
plants” and constantly calculate the indices with
very little lag time, usually just seconds. Futures
indices are considered leading indicators. Index
futures are very actively traded. They tend to
move before the underlying stocks. More discus-
sion of futures follows.
Keep in mind that you need only follow either
the cash indices or the futures indices. It is not nec-
essary to follow both.
MARKET INDICES
In the business world, nothing is truly indepen-
dent from the rest of the world. Economies are
interrelated. The economy of Europe can affect the
economy of Asia. The same is true in the stock
market. If the general market is bullish, a large per-
centage of stocks will head up. In a general market
decline, most stocks will head down. Traders who
forget this fact have a hard time making a profit.
They struggle because they are fighting the gen-
eral sentiment of the market.
The Nasdaq Composite charts in Figures 10.3
and 10.4 show that going long on stocks between
October and March in 2000 would have generated
good profits. Both investors and traders made a lot
of money holding onto their stocks during that
period (see Figure 10.3).
Going long during the period shown in Figure
10.4 would have resulted in disaster. The market
declined more than 50 percent from September to
March in 2001.
These two charts cover a long time period. But
the relationship between market direction and the
14762_Chua_2p_c10.j.qxp 2/2/07 11:37 AM Page 183
184 SAMMY CHUA’S DAY TRADE YOUR WAY TO FINANCIAL FREEDOM
10.3 Market Trend
� THE TREND ON THIS NASDAQ CHART is clearly up. Taking long positions onindividual stocks offers a much better chance of success during these times.
10.4 Market Trend
� THE TREND ON THIS NASDAQ CHART here is down. During these times, it isbetter to be trading short positions on individual stocks. The market weaknessdragged almost all the stock prices down with it.
14762_Chua_2p_c10.j.qxp 2/2/07 11:37 AM Page 184
PREPARING FOR THE OPEN 185
direction of individual stocks is also true in the
short term. In the short term, a high percentage of
stocks will follow the market. If the market is
strong, long positions on individual stocks have a
good likelihood of success. If the market is weak,
short positions would be a better choice.
Make sure you know the general market direction
before making a trade. Here are some of the cash
market indices that traders should follow.
Dow Jones Industrial AverageThe most famous market index and the one most
associated with the stock market is the Dow Jones
Industrial Average (the Dow). The Dow is made
up of 30 industrial stocks. They represent the
largest companies in America. The current list of
companies on the Dow can be found on most
financial web sites.
NYSE Composite IndexThe NYSE Composite Index is made up of all 3,300
stocks listed on the NYSE. This index is weighted
based on capitalization. Companies with large
capitalization have more weight in the index than
smaller companies. Large-capitalization stocks
move the market more than their smaller counter-
parts. This index works better than the Dow Jones
30 Index to determine the strength or weakness of
the NYSE.
S&P 500 and S&P 100Standard and Poor’s (S&P) has two indices that
have become barometers of the market: the S&P
500 and the S&P 100. Both of these indices are
capitalization-weighted. The S&P 500 is made up
of 500 large- and mid-cap stocks, and the S&P 100
(OEX) is made up of the 100 largest stocks from
the S&P 500.
The S&P 500 represents all major industries,
including 400 industrial stocks, 20 transportation
stocks, 40 financial stocks, and 40 utility stocks.
Because of the larger number of companies
involved and its wider scope, this index is one of
the better barometers of where the market is
headed. This index is also widely used to measure
the performance of money managers. Mutual
fund managers and institutional investors are
often graded by their ability to beat this index.
Fund managers who have produced gains less
than this index often find investors moving their
capital to index funds, which have lower fees.
This makes it the most closely watched index of
them all.
Nasdaq Composite and Nasdaq 100 IndexNasdaq comprises more than 5,000 securities and
has a high concentration of technology stocks. The
Nasdaq Composite Index is generally considered a
good barometer of technology stocks. Nasdaq is a
two-tiered structure consisting of the Nasdaq
National Market (NNM) and the Nasdaq Small-
Cap Market.
The Nasdaq National Market is made up of
larger companies with actively traded securities.
The Nasdaq Small-Cap Market is made up of com-
panies with assets of less than $12 million. Within
these two tiers there are more than a dozen differ-
ent Nasdaq indices.
14762_Chua_2p_c10.j.qxp 2/2/07 11:37 AM Page 185
The Nasdaq Index is roughly valued at about
one-fifth of the Dow, which means that a one-point
change in the Nasdaq equals a five-point change in
the Dow. To research other Nasdaq indices, visit
www.nasdaq.com on the web.
The Nasdaq 100 consists of the largest Nasdaq
stocks. It is a good barometer for the overall
Nasdaq market and is closely watched by many
day traders.
Other IndicesThere are many other sector indices that you can
follow. Intraday, I would pay attention to only
those sectors that include my trading candidates.
Here’s a partial list of the different sector indices
and their symbols.
Banks and Financial Index (BKX)
Dow Jones Transportation Average (TRANS)
Dow Jones Utility Index (UTIL)
Networking Index (DOT)
Oil Services (OSX)
Retailers (RLX)
Gas Index (XNG)
Cyclicals Index (CYC)
Healthcare (HCX)
Broker/Dealers Index (XBD)
Insurance (IUX)
Semiconductor Index (SOX)
Biotech Index (BTK)
186 SAMMY CHUA’S DAY TRADE YOUR WAY TO FINANCIAL FREEDOM
OTHER MARKET INDICATORS
Here are several other indicators you should be
aware of.
Arms Index (TRIN)The Arms Index, more commonly known as the
TRIN, is a ratio calculated by first dividing advanc-
ing issues by declining issues and then dividing the
resulting number by up volume divided by down
volume. A falling Arms signals a strong market,
and a rising Arms suggests weakness.
VIX/VXNThe VIX is the Chicago Board Options Exchange
(CBOE) Volatility Index, which reflects the mar-
ket consensus estimate of future volatility by
measuring the implied volatility of OEX options.
The VIX tends to be high when the market is
extremely volatile, especially during market
declines. It tends to be low when the market is
less volatile, usually during extreme up moves
and sideways movement. As a result, high read-
ings usually signify too much bearishness, while
low readings signify complacency. The VIX can
be used to measure market sentiment. When
combined with additional timing triggers, it
offers the opportunity to identify market
extremes and likely reversal points.
Advance/Decline LineThe advance/decline line gives you a good idea of
the true breadth of the market. It indicates how
many stocks are up for every stock that is down. If
14762_Chua_2p_c10.j.qxp 2/2/07 11:37 AM Page 186
PREPARING FOR THE OPEN 187
more stocks are down than up, then we should be
wary of any attempted rally. It indicates a weak
market. A strong market would have more stocks
up than down.
McClellan OscillatorThe McClellan Oscillator is a market breadth indi-
cator based on the smoothed difference between
advancing and declining issues. Markets are con-
sidered oversold when the oscillator is below −100
and overbought when it is above +100.
This indicator is not a precise market-timing
tool. Overbought readings can often become even
more overbought. Oversold readings can become
even more oversold, especially in a trending mar-
ket. Therefore, we strongly recommend using the
McClellan Oscillator in conjunction with other
market bias indicators.
10.5 Identifying a Trade Candidate (ADVP)
� SEVERAL POINTS MADE ADVP A TRADE CANDIDATE. Point A shows that thisstock is in a downtrend. Point B shows the stock price crossing over fromabove the short-term MA line back down. Point C shows a bearish engulfingpattern. Finally, point D shows RSI rising above the 70 percent line andcoming back down below it (a sell signal).
14762_Chua_2p_c10.j.qxp 2/2/07 11:37 AM Page 187
DIRECTION OF MARKET TRENDS
When day trading, the intraday direction of the
market should be your number one concern. If the
trend is up, trade only the long candidates on your
list. If the trend is down, trade only the short candi-
dates on your list.
This idea seems ridiculously simple, but it is the
most powerful way to trade. There will be occa-
sions when the market does not have any trend.
These are the days to sit on your hands and do
188 SAMMY CHUA’S DAY TRADE YOUR WAY TO FINANCIAL FREEDOM
nothing. This method makes a lot of sense. Think
of what it means to have the market in your favor.
It means you will trade only candidates with a
high demand or a high supply. If the stochastic
trader, the trend trader, the pattern trader, and the
breakout trader all get into the same stock at the
same time, the price will most assuredly go up. On
the other hand, if the RSI trader, the MACD trader,
the breakdown trader, and the chart pattern trader
all get sell signals at the same time, the price will
most assuredly go down.
10.6 ADVP Intraday Trade
� A TRADE WAS TAKEN ON ADVP once it broke the support of the rounded top pattern. The entry point(C) was at 30.05. An exit signal (H) was generated when a bullish reversal pattern (double bottom)confirmed at 28.60. Total profit for the trade was $1.45.
14762_Chua_2p_c10.j.qxp 2/2/07 11:37 AM Page 188
PREPARING FOR THE OPEN 189
Traders take a short ride on the up or down
side, take their profit, and move on to the next
trade. This way of trading, coupled with proper
risk management, makes success a possibility, not
just an empty dream. A few examples of this type
of trading follow.
I spotted ADVP as short. If you look at the daily
chart in Figure 10.5, several factors favored a short
position. I marked each of these on the chart in Fig-
ure 10.5. They are the following: The stock is now
in a clear downtrend. It crossed over the 20-period
EMA to close below it. For short-term trading, this
is a bearish indication. It has a bearish engulfing
pattern. The only thing missing is the bearish con-
firmation. The seven-period RSI was crossed and
closed below it.
All of this made ADVP more attractive than the
rest of the candidates. It showed up at the bottom
of the ranking system.
On the intraday front, here is what happened.
10.7 Identifying a Trade Candidate (MERQE)
� FOUR POINTS MADE MERQE AN INTERESTING TRADE CANDIDATE. First, point Ashows a symmetrical triangle. With the trend up, this is a good continuationpattern. Point B shows a bullish harami pattern with a confirming candlestickbesides it. Point C shows a moving average crossover from below to above.This is another buy signal. Finally, the slope of MACD also turned up at thesame time.
14762_Chua_2p_c10.j.qxp 2/2/07 11:37 AM Page 189
The first confirmation came at the open. The stock
closed at $30.73 and opened the next day at $30.29.
We have a downside gap at point A in Figure 10.6.
We earlier discussed this candlestick pattern as
one of the bearish confirmations.
The next confirmation came when the stock
formed a rounded top pattern on location C, a
bearish formation. Your entry point would be
based on the entry of a rounded top pattern,
which is a break of the support level. In this case,
190 SAMMY CHUA’S DAY TRADE YOUR WAY TO FINANCIAL FREEDOM
this pattern was a continuation of the weakness
because of the downtrend at location B from the
previous period.
Our entry would be at point D, once the price
broke the support level E at 30.05. The stock con-
tinued its decline and formed a double bottom
chart pattern at F. A break of the resistance G at
$28.60 would have signaled an exit. Total profit is
$1.45, a 5 percent run.
Now let’s look at a long candidate. I spotted
10.8 MERQE Intraday Trade
� A BREAK OF THE SYMMETRICAL TRIANGLE (A) triggered a long entry of this stock intraday at 26.85 (B). Using our trailingstop method described earlier, we moved our stop from support level D all the way to support level J. Trade was exited at29.65 when it broke support level J. Total profit on this trade was $2.80, more than a 10 percent run in two days!
14762_Chua_2p_c10.j.qxp 2/2/07 11:37 AM Page 190
MERQE for a possible long position trade from my
research the previous day. The daily chart in Fig-
ure 10.7 shows several things favoring a long posi-
tion if intraday conditions were right. I marked
each of these on the chart in Figure 10.8. They are
as follows:
Stock is in a nice symmetrical triangle pattern.
It has a bullish harami pattern. It also had a bullish confir-
mation candlestick the next day.
It crossed over the 20-period EMA to close above it. For
short-term trading, this is a bullish indication. Trend has
just turned up.
The MACD histogram has also turned up.
All of this made MERQE more attractive than the
other candidates. It showed up at the top of the
ranking system.
On the intraday front, here is what happened.
Keep in mind what happened the day before.
We had a marubozu candlestick, which tells us
the stock probably had a nice uptrend all day. Con-
firmation came when MERQE formed symmetri-
cal triangle A on the intraday charts (see Figure
10.8). When found after an initial uptrend, this
confirms that the uptrend is still intact and is likely
to continue.
According to the trading signals of the symmet-
rical triangle pattern, we should enter on a trend-
line break. This would be at entry point B, at
$26.85. The stop-loss point should be at the low of
the day or at the last minor support (C).
Using the trailing stop method described in the
support and resistance section, every time the
price broke out and established a new high, we
would move our stop-loss up. Our exit price
would be moved from C to D, and the D to E, all
the way to J.
A break of the support at K triggered our exit at
K. The trade went from $26.85 to $29.65 in two
days. Note that while a position is going in your
favor, it is best to just observe the stop-loss points
and keep the position. Profit in this case was $2.80,
a 10 percent run.
KEEP A TRADE JOURNAL
Keeping a journal of your successes and failures
can help you learn. Unless you study your mis-
takes, it is impossible for you to know which
PREPARING FOR THE OPEN 191
Here is the information to record in your journal:
• Date
• Symbol
• Entry price
• Number of shares
• Exit price
• Trade signals
• Market conditions
• Profit/loss per share
• Total profit/loss
• Lessons
Your Trade Journal
14762_Chua_2p_c10.j.qxp 2/5/07 2:07 PM Page 191
aspects of trading you need to improve. A large
part of trading is simply minimizing mistakes. If
you make just 20 percent fewer mistakes and cal-
culate that into your trading, you will be amazed
at the results.
There are many possible mistakes in trading.
You can trade late, missing an opportunity, or exit
too late, sustaining a loss. Your positions can be too
large. Knowing your weaknesses is vital to your
progress. What methodology generated the sig-
nals you used? Have these signals been weak in
the past? Do you need to adjust their values or stop
trading them?
You can eliminate mistakes only if you know
what they are. If you keep getting in late, set your
alerts a little earlier. This gives you time to place
the order. Sometimes a mistake might not be your
fault. It could be the system. Maybe your informa-
tion provider is late. It might be time to change to
a new data provider. Question everything.
The other major purpose of a trading journal is
to identify correct behavior. Did you trade cor-
rectly? Did you make money? Did you lose money?
192 SAMMY CHUA’S DAY TRADE YOUR WAY TO FINANCIAL FREEDOM
Even losing money can be part of correct behavior.
Remember, taking losses is part of the profession.
Never blame yourself for a loss if you used a
proper stop-loss point. The market just failed to
go as planned. It simply went into the lower-
probability scenario.
Your goal is to find consistent profitability.
What conditions existed on your good trades?
What were the confirmation signals? These intri-
cate details are important because they can form
the basis of future trading. Pay attention to the sig-
nals that generated the winning trades. What
methodology or what indicator worked? Should
you consider assigning a higher value to it? Strate-
gies that have consistently made money for you
should have a greater value. Move them to the top
of your watch list.
All this work will ultimately lay the foundation
of a successful day trading career. Evaluate your
trades every day and continue to improve your
techniques and methods. Once all of this is done,
the process repeats itself. Keep your discipline and
continue trading your plan. Success will be yours. ●$
14762_Chua_2p_c10.j.qxp 2/2/07 11:37 AM Page 192
ConclusionWe have covered many things throughout this book. We touched on the differences between the
exchanges. Some of you will favor the fast pace of the over-the-counter market, and some will
choose to trade the slower auction markets. Either one is fine. The key is to be comfortable in the
environment you choose.
Next, we discussed the different types of orders and brokerages. Although most of you might
think it trivial, your success depends on these important aspects. Even your Internet connection is
important. You do not want your computer to hang up while you are in a position that is going
against you. Make sure you take care of these little details at the start, so you can spend your time
trading and not worrying.
Finally, we covered the other elements needed to become successful. We discussed technical
analysis, candlestick patterns, different indicators, risk management, and trading preparation. All
of them are of equal importance. To pay attention to one and forget the other is like going to war
without the proper preparations and the proper tools. It is foolhardy. You may win a few battles,
but never the war. And believe me, trading is war. You struggle every day against other traders that
have the same intentions as you do, and that is to take money from you.
If you want to succeed, you must be better than the rest. You must be better prepared. You must
have the best tools. You must have a solid plan. You must be more disciplined and more patient.
And you must work harder than the rest. That is how you rise above the other 98% who constantly
fail in this endeavor.
For those of you who want to learn more and are serious about starting a new career in day trad-
ing, please go to my website at www.sammychua.com for more information. I would love to help
guide you step-by-step in reaching your goal as a professional day trader, and in the process, find-
ing your financial freedom.
14762_Chua_2p_c11.j.qxp 2/2/07 11:37 AM Page 193
14762_Chua_2p_c11.j.qxp 2/2/07 11:37 AM Page 194
AAccumulation/distribution (A/D)
indicator, 171–173formula, 172
Advance/decline line, 186–187Alerts:
placement, 182setting, 180–183
All-or-none (AON) order, 38American Stock Exchange (Amex), 40–41Angle/slope, importance. See TrendlinesAppel, Gerald, 158Archipelago (ARCA), 21, 22, 43, 45
ECN, 28Arithmetic scale, 71Arithmetic scaling, contrast. See
Logarithmic scalingArms Index (TRIN), 186Ascending triangles, 99–101Attain (ATTN), 22, 43, 44Average downward price change,
calculation, 167Average upward price change,
calculation, 167Ax, shadowing, 61
BBack testing, 62–63Bar charts, 67–68Bearish abandoned baby pattern, 148Bearish divergence, 165–166, 170Bearish engulfing harami patterns,
149–150Bearish engulfing patterns, 140–142Bearish harami pattern, 144–145
combinations, 144Bearish patterns, 105, 139–150Bearish reversal, 140Bearish stochastic divergence, 166Bearish stocks, negative values, 178
INDEXBuy stop order, 35–36Buying momentum, 94, 135Buying /selling pressures:
comparison, 118–119identification (see Heavy
buying /selling pressures
CCancellation order, 37Candlesticks, 68–69. See also 20/20
candlestick; Long black candle-stick; Long white candlestick; Opencandlestick; White candlestick
capability, limitations, 122–123charting techniques, 116patterns, 123–127 (see also Closed
candlestick pattern; Opencandlestick pattern)
positions, 127–130usage (see Indecision)wicks, 69
Capital, usage. See TradingCash accounts, 31, 32Cash indices, 183Charles Schwab Corporation, 26, 28Charting techniques, 72–73Charts, 30. See Bar charts; Line charts;
Point/figure chartspatterns, 96–112 (See also Relative
strength index)types, 67–71usage, 67–73 (See also Tick-by-tick
chart)Chicago Board Options Exchange
(CBOE), 186CINN identifier, 44Closed candlestick pattern, 116Closing price, 87, 119Combination patterns, 130Commissions, per-share basis, 29Common gaps, 89–90
Best ask, 8Best bid, 8Bid/ask spread, 45Black marubozu, 118, 121, 134
midpoint, 133Black/black combinations, 144–145,
149–150Black/white combinations, 144–145,
149–150Bloomberg Tradebook (BTRD), 22, 43Breakaway gaps, 90–93
confirmation, volume levels (usage),90
Breakdown/breakout point, 108Brokerage firms:
accounts, types, 30–32execution speed, 27features (see Online brokerage firm
features)price, importance, 29–30reliability, 27–28selection, 26–27service, importance, 30
Broker-dealer fee structure, 45Brokers. See Direct access brokers;
Discount brokers; Full-service brokersdefinition, 8
Brut (Brass Utilities) (SunGard Data), 22,43, 44
ECN, 28BTRD. See Bloomberg TradebookBullish abandoned baby, 138Bullish divergence, 165Bullish engulfing harami pattern,
136–137Bullish engulfing pattern, 130–133Bullish harami pattern, 133–135, 140Bullish patterns, 130–139Bullish reversal, 124Buy limit order, 35
14762_Chua_2p_bindex.j.qxp 2/2/07 11:37 AM Page 195
Continuation gaps, 93–94Corporate stock/bonds, trading, 14Crossovers, 158–159. See also
Stochastic oscillatorstrategy (see Moving average
convergence divergence)Cup with handle pattern, 110–112Customers, 9CyberExchange, 28–29CyberTrader, 28, 29CyberTrader Pro, 180
DDark cloud cover pattern, 142–144Day traders:
NYSE/Nasdaq usefulness,comparison, 20
SEC definition, 31Day trading:
overview, 5personality fit, 2–3usefulness, 1
Dealers:definition, 8fee structure (see Broker-dealer fee
structure)Decimal pricing, 60Descending triangles, 99–101Designated Order Turnaround (DOT):
orders, 44system (see Super Designated Order
Turnaround system)Direct access brokers, 27
costs, 30order routing efficiency, 28
Direct access order entry system, 40Discipline, maintenance. See TradingDiscount brokers, 26Divergences, 159–160. See also Bearish
divergence; Bullish divergence; Movingaverage convergence divergence;Price; Relative strength index;Stochastic oscillator
DJIA. See Dow Jones Industrial Average
Dojis (spinning tops), 119–121, 138.See also Dragonfly doji; Gravestonedoji; Long-legged dojis
Domestic Securities, 44Double bottom pattern, 76–77Double top/bottom patterns, 96–98Dow, Charles (concepts), 66Dow Jones Industrial, 30, 183Dow Jones Industrial Average (DJIA), 185Downside gap, 91Downtrends, 80–83, 135, 138, 156Downward price change:
calculation (see Average downwardprice change)
determination, 167Dragonfly doji, 123–124
EElder, Alexander, 73Electronic communications networks
(ECNs), 20–22discussion, 42–43establishment, 27introduction, 21list, 43process, explanation, 21–22usage, 18usefulness, 45
E-Mini Nasdaq 100 futures, 161Entry points, 179E*Trade, 29E-trading services, 26Evening star doji, 147Evening star pattern, 147–149Exchange floor, personnel, 9Exhaustion gaps, 93, 95–96Exponential moving average (EMA), 153
contrast (see Simple moving average)formula, 154
FFading the gaps. See GapsFast line (%K), 158, 163–164Fidelity, 26Fill-or-kill (FOK) order, 38
Firm Quote Rule, 41Flags, 105–106, 111Floor:
brokers, 9clerks, 9traders, 9
Full gap down, 89Full gap up, 89Full-service brokers, 26Fundamental analysis, 62Futures, 173–174
GGap down, 127, 128, 148. See also Full
gap down; Partial gap downGap up, 125, 128, 133, 148. See also
Full gap up; Partial gap upGaps. See Breakaway gaps; Common
gaps; Continuation gaps; Downsidegap; Exhaustion gaps
confirmation, volume (usage), 112fading, 89occurrence, 87–96selling pressure, absorption, 139types, 89
Gerald Putnam, 43Good-for-the-day (GTD) order, 38Good-till-canceled (GTC) order, 37Granville, Joseph, 170Gravestone doji, 124
HHammer pattern (hanging man pattern),
121, 124–125. See also Invertedhammer pattern
Harami pattern. See Bearish engulfingharami patterns; Bearish haramipattern; Bullish engulfing haramipattern; Bullish harami pattern
Harami position, 128–130Head/shoulders pattern, 103Head/shoulders top pattern, 101–102Heavy buying/selling pressures,
identification, 116–118Height, 75
196 INDEX
14762_Chua_2p_bindex.j.qxp 2/2/07 11:37 AM Page 196
INDEX 197
Histogram. See Moving averageconvergence divergence
Hi-waves, 120Houtkin, Harvey, 44
IImmediate-or-cancel (IOC) order, 38Indecision (identification), candlesticks
(usage), 119–120Indicators. See Technical indicators
usage, 152–153INET, 21, 44
ECN, 28, 45purchase, 40
Information power, 17–18Inside range days (IRDs), 134Instinet, 44Institutional firms, examples, 16Internet connection. See TradingInternet Service Provider (ISP)
connection, 28Interperiod noise, 157–158Intraday Nasdaq charts, 52Intraday trading, 183Intraday-trend trading, 61, 87Intraperiod activity, understanding,
120–127Inverted hammer pattern (shooting star
pattern), 121, 125–127Investment banks, examples, 17IRDs. See Inside range daysIsland ECNs, 44
KKnight Capital Group, 44
LLagging indicators, 183Lane, George, 163Large-cap stocks, 7–8Limit order, 34–35, 45. See also Buy
limit order; Sell limit order; Shortlimit order; Stop-limit order
usage, 35Line charts, 69
Livermore, Jesse (failure), 55Logarithmic scale, 71–72Logarithmic scaling, arithmetic scaling
(contrast), 87Long black candlestick, 121Long positions, 32–33Long white candlestick, 116, 120Long-legged dojis, 119, 121Long-term trading, 62
MMACD. See Moving average convergence
divergenceMargin accounts, 31–32Margin call, occurrence, 31Market:
direction, 185indicators, 186–187indices, 183–186intraday direction, 188order, 34, 45orderliness, maintenance, 16trading range, 82trends, direction, 188–191
Market markers:responsibilities, 16types, 16–17understanding, 15–17
Market-at-close order, 38Market-at-open order, 38Marubozu. See Black marubozu; White
marubozucandlestick, 191
MAs. See Moving averagesMcClelland Oscillator, 187Member firms, 9Momentum. See Buying momentum;
Selling momentumconfirmation, 113scalpers, 60–61
Morning star pattern, 137–139Morris, Greg, 130Moving average convergence divergence
(MACD), 158–160crossover strategy, 63
histogram, 161divergences, 161–163slope direction change, 161
usage, 82Moving averages (MAs), 153–158. See
also Exponential moving average;Simple moving average; Weightedmoving average
advantages/disadvantages,157–158
line, position, 158periods, number (selection),
154usage, 82uses, 154–156
Municipal bonds, trading, 14
NNational Association of Securities
Dealers Automated QuotationSystem (Nasdaq), 14–15
100 Index, 183, 185–186comparison. See New York Stock
ExchangeComposite, 183, 185–186Market Center, 40–41, 44National Market (NNM), 40, 185National Market Securities (NMS), 15,
41negotiated market, 15quiz, 23service level I, 18service level II, 18–19, 42service level III, 19SmallCap Market, 40, 41traded securities, classification,
15trading, 45
National Association of Securities Dealers (NASD), 14–15
quiz, 23regulatory framework, 22
Negotiated market. See NationalAssociation of Securities DealersAutomated Quotation System
14762_Chua_2p_bindex.j.qxp 2/2/07 11:37 AM Page 197
New York Stock Exchange (NYSE), 6Composite Index, 183, 185level II screens, information,
17–18listed stocks, 7–8Nasdaq, comparison, 20quiz, 23technological advances, 7time lines, 7
News/research services, 30NexTrade (NTRD), 22, 45Nison, Steve, 134, 144NMS. See National Association of
Securities Dealers AutomatedQuotation System
NNM. See National Association ofSecurities Dealers AutomatedQuotation System
OOEX, 185On-balance volume (OBV), 170–171O’Neil, William, 1101-2-3 reversal method, 83–84Online brokerage firm features, 30Open candlestick, 68
pattern, 116Opening price, 87Optimization:
avoidance (see Trading)understanding, 51, 52
Options transactions, 32Order:
books, computerization, 35cancellation, 45execution systems, review, 45routing, 28–29
Order-driven price movement, 20Oscillators, 152. See also Stochastic
oscillatorOutside market, 18Overbought/oversold conditions,
159Overbought/oversold levels, 164
Over-the-counter bulletin board (OTCBB),20, 41
Over-the-counter (OTC):market, 6, 14trades, 43
PPartial gap down, 89Partial gap up, 89Patterns. See Bearish patterns; Bullish
patterns; Charts; Combinationpatterns; Piercing pattern
Pennants, 105–106, 111Periods, number (selection). See Moving
averagesPer-share stop loss, 180Piercing pattern, 133Pivot points, 173–174
calculation, 173Point /figure charts, 70–71Positions. See Candlesticks; Harami
position; Long positions; Shortpositions; Star position
shorting guidelines, 33–34types, 32–34
Price:advance, 125change
calculation (see Average downwardprice change; Average upwardprice change)
determination (see Downward price change; Upward pricechange)
decline, 127discounts, importance, 66divergence, 161importance. See Brokerage firmsmovements, 71movements, predictability, 66scaling, types, 71–72support level, 101
Proprietary accounts, trading, 16Pullback, 136
QQuick & Reilly, 26Quote services, 30
RRectangle patterns, 106–109Regional firms, examples, 17Relative strength index (RSI), 166–170
calculation, 167chart patterns, 168–169day separation, 167divergences, 169–170formula, 166–167levels, 168prices, divergences, 169
Resistance:area, 118breaking, 78identification (see
Support/resistance)levels, 73, 103
break, 74breakout, 80
support level, 77Reversal amount, 71Reversal method. See 1-2-3 reversal
methodReversal points, 186Reverse head/shoulders pattern,
103–104Reward-to-risk ratio, 50–51, 85Risk management, 49, 55–56,
179–180work, 55
Rounded bottoms/tops, 109–110RSI. See Relative strength index
SSaucer pattern, 109Scaling, contrast. See Logarithmic scalingScalping, 60–61
backtesting, inability, 62–63Scott Trade, 26
198 INDEX
14762_Chua_2p_bindex.j.qxp 2/2/07 11:37 AM Page 198
INDEX 199
Sector indices, 186Securities and Exchange Commission
(SEC) enforcement, 22Self-reliance. See TradingSell limit order, 35Sell stop order, 36Selling momentum, 146Sell-off marks, 101Service, importance. See Brokerage firmsShadowing the ax. See AxShares (number) trading, calculation,
51–52Shooting star pattern. See Inverted
hammer patternShort limit order, 35Short positions, 32–33, 84Short selling, dangers, 34Short stop, 36Short the tops. See TopsShort-term analysis, 140Shoulder:
formation, 102pattern (see Head/shoulders top
pattern; Reverse head/shoulderspattern)
Sideways movement, 105Simple moving average (SMA), 153
EMA, contrast, 157Slippage, 34Slow line (%D), 158, 163–164, 173Small-cap market, 15SOES orders, 41S&P. See Standard and Poor’sSpearandeo, Victor, 83Specialist:
clerk, 9definition, 8system, 8–9
Spinning tops. See DojisSpread, capture, 60Standard and Poor’s:
100 (S&P100), 183, 185500 (S&P500), 185
index, 86
Star position, 128Stochastic oscillator, 163–166
crossovers, 164–165divergence, 165–166
Stock, price action, 153Stock exchanges, 6
system, 6–7Stock liquidity, 15Stock markets:
expensiveness, 74overview, 6
Stop order, 35. See also Buy stop order;Sell stop order
Stop price, 36Stop-limit order, 36–37Stop-loss order, 76
placement, 94, 95, 170Stop-loss point, 52–53, 78, 92, 99
hit, 162setting, 107–108, 110
Super Designated Order Turnaround (SuperDOT) system, 9–11, 44–46
usage, 20SuperMontage, 41–42SuperSOES orders, 41Support level, 73
break, 190breakdown, 81establishment, 78
Support/resistance:area, price range, 75identification, 73–76strength, 75–76
Swing trading, 61–62Symmetrical triangles, 99–101, 191
TTD Waterhouse, 26Technical analysis, 62, 66Technical indicators, 152Teenie, 60Terra Nova Trading, 43Text chat, usage, 30Three black cows pattern, 145–147
Three white soldiers pattern, 135–136,146
Tick-by-tick chart, usage, 67Time frames, impact, 86–87Timing sequence, 32Tops, shorting, 85TotalView, 42Townsend Analytics, Ltd., 43Trade execution, 30Trade journal, keeping, 191–192Trading. See Intraday-trend trading;
Long-term trading; Swing tradingactivity, 123capital, usage, 48computer, usage, 48–49days, 178discipline, maintenance, 53–54Internet connection, 49knowledge, impact, 48losses, acceptance, 52–53methodology, 49, 56–58patience, 54perseverance, 54products, 30, 32psychological barriers, avoidance,
56–57psychology, 49–55range. See Marketrequirements, 48–49research, 178–179risks, 55screens, setting, 180–183self-reliance, 54–55signals, 179
generation, 172–173strategies, 60, 76–79success, 50
elements, 48system optimization, avoidance, 51–52time, importance, 48
Trading orders:selection, 34terms, 37–38types, 34–38
14762_Chua_2p_bindex.j.qxp 2/2/07 11:37 AM Page 199
Trailing stop, 78Transactions, execution, 16Trend reversal area, 137–138Trend-following indicators, 152–153,
174, 179usage, 82
Trend-following system, 51Trendlines, 79–87, 106
angle/slope, importance,84–86
break, signal, 84validity, 87
Trend-reversal patterns, 96Trends:
formation, 66identification, 152
Triangles. See Ascending triangles; Descending triangle; Symmetricaltriangles
patterns, 99–101trading, 99
TRIN. See Arms Index20/20 candlestick, 116, 1182 percent rule, usage, 57–58
UUptick:
definition, 33rule (removal), SEC proposal, 33–34
Uptrends, 80, 148–149, 156Upward price change:
calculation (see Average upward pricechange)
determination, 167U.S. government securities/agency
securities, trading, 14
VVolatility Index (VIX/VXN), 186Volume, 75–76
analysis, 112–114bars, 113
WWedge formation, 104–105Weighted moving average (WMA),
153White candlestick, 68White marubozu, 116, 120, 134
candlestick, 116–117, 122, 135White/black combinations,
144–145White/white combinations,
144–145Wholesalers, examples, 17Width, 75Wilder, Welles, 166, 168Williams, Larry, 171Wire houses, examples, 17
200 INDEX
14762_Chua_2p_bindex.j.qxp 2/2/07 11:37 AM Page 200